8.2.2 Radio Bearer Addition, Modification and Release

38.523-13GPP5GSPart 1: ProtocolRelease 17TSUser Equipment (UE) conformance specification

8.2.2.1 Radio Bearer Addition, Modification and Release / SRB

8.2.2.1.1 SRB3 Establishment, Reconfiguration and Release / NR addition, modification and release / EN-DC

8.2.2.1.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to add SRB3 }

then { UE establishes SRB3 and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG and SRB3 configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on SRB3 including secondaryCellGroup to reconfigure NR MAC }

then { UE sends RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3 }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG and SRB3 configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on SRB3 including radioBearerConfig to reconfigure NR PDCP }

then { UE sends RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3 }

}

(4)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to release SRB3 }

then {UE releases SRB3 and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 }

}

8.2.2.1.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3, TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.1, 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.1, 5.3.5.5.3, 5.3.5.5.4, 5.3.5.5.8, 5.3.5.5.9, 5.3.5.6.1, 5.3.5.6.2 and 5.3.5.6.3. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 36.331, 5.3.5.3]

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-Config and it is set to release: or

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes endc-ReleaseAndAdd:

2> perform ENDC release as specified in TS38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.10;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.1]

In (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC, SRB3 can be used for measurement configuration and reporting, to (re-)configure MAC, RLC, physical layer and RLF timers and constants of the SCG configuration, and to reconfigure PDCP for DRBs associated with the S-KgNB or SRB3, and to reconfigure SDAP for DRBs associated with S-KgNB in (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC, provided that the (re-)configuration does not require any MN involvement. In EN-DC, only measConfig, radioBearerConfig and/or secondaryCellGroup are included in RRCReconfiguration received via SRB3.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> construct RRCReconfigurationComplete message and submit it via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

2> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB3):

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

NOTE: In the case of SRB1, the random access is triggered by RRC layer itself as there is not necessarily other UL transmission. In the case of SRB3, the random access is triggered by the MAC layer due to arrival of RRCReconfigurationComplete.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.1]

The UE performs the following actions based on a received CellGroupConfig IE:

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the rlc-BearerToReleaseList:

2> perform RLC bearer release as specified in 5.3.5.5.3;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the rlc-BearerToAddModList:

2> perform the RLC bearer addition/modification as specified in 5.3.5.5.4;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the mac-CellGroupConfig:

2> configure the MAC entity of this cell group as specified in 5.3.5.5.5;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the sCellToReleaseList:

2> perform SCell release as specified in 5.3.5.5.8;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the sCellToAddModList:

2> perform SCell addition/modification as specified in 5.3.5.5.9.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.3]

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value included in the rlc-BearerToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (LCH release); or

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value that is to be released as the result of an SCG release according to 5.3.5.4:

2> release the RLC entity or entities as specified in TS 38.322 [4, clause 5.1.3];

2> release the corresponding logical channel.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.4]

For each RLC-Bearer-Config received in the rlc-BearerToAddModList IE the UE shall:

1> if the UE’s current configuration contains a RLC bearer with the received logicalChannelIdentity:

2> reconfigure the RLC entity or entities in accordance with the received rlc-Config;

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.8]

The UE shall:

1> if the release is triggered by reception of the sCellToReleaseList:

2> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToReleaseList:

3> if the current UE configuration includes an SCell with value sCellIndex:

4> release the SCell.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.9]

The UE shall:

1> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SCell addition):

2> add the SCell, corresponding to the sCellIndex, in accordance with the sCellConfigCommon and sCellConfigDedicated;

2> configure lower layers to consider the SCell to be in deactivated state;

1> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (SCell modification):

2> modify the SCell configuration in accordance with the sCellConfigDedicated.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.6.1]

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb3-ToRelease and set to true:

2> perform the SRB release as specified in 5.3.5.6.2;

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb-ToAddModList:

2> perform the SRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.3;

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.6.2]

The UE shall:

1> release the PDCP entity of the SRB3.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.6.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment or reconfiguration from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

8.2.2.1.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.1.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell

– System Information combination as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.1 is used in E-UTRA Cell 1 and NR Cell 1.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– The UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC) and DC bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) according to TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.5.1-1.

8.2.2.1.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to add SRB3 sent on SRB1/E-UTRA Cell 1.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

(RRCReconfiguration)

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1/E-UTRA Cell 1?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

(RRCReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

3

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message to reconfigure NR MAC sent on SRB3/NR Cell 1.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

4

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3/NR Cell 1?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

5

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message to reconfigure NR PDCP sent on SRB3/NR Cell 1.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

6

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3/NR Cell 1?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to release SRB3 sent on SRB1/E-UTRA Cell 1.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1/E-UTRA Cell 1?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

4

P

9

The SS releases the RRC connection.

8.2.2.1.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 with condition EN-DC_EmbedNR_RRCRecon and EN-DC_Embed_RBConfig

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message according to table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-1A.

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

RadioBearerConfig according to 38.508-1 [4] Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB3

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-1A: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-1B.

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-1B: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-1A)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-Bearer-Config[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

logicalChannelIdentity

3

servedRadioBearer CHOICE {

srb-Identity

3

}

}

mac-CellGroupConfig

Not Present

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not Present

spCellConfig

Not Present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-2: RRCReconfiguration (step 3, Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-3.

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-3: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Not present

rlc-BearerToReleaseList

Not present

mac-CellGroupConfig

MAC-CellGroupConfig according to table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-3a

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not present

spCellConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-3a: MAC-CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-3)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-68

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

MAC-CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drx-config

Not present.

schedulingRequestConfig

Not present.

bsr-Config SEQUENCE {

periodicBSR-Timer

sf5

retxBSR-Timer

sf40

}

tag-Config

Not present.

phr-Config

Not present.

skipUplinkTxDynamic

Not present.

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step 5, Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table: 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

RadioBearerConfig

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-4B

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-4A: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-4B)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table: 4.6.3-99 with condition SRB

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

t-Reordering

ms20

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-4B: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB3

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

pdcp-Config SEQUENCE {

PDCP-Config

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-5: Void

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-6: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 with condition EN-DC_EmbedNR_RRCRecon and EN-DC_Embed_RBConfig

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {}

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message according to table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-8.

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

RadioBearerConfig according to Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-7

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-7: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb3-ToRelease

true

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-8: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-9.

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-9: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition EN-DC

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Not Present

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

1 entry

logicalChannelIdentity[1]

3

entry 1

}

mac-CellGroupConfig SEQUENCE {

Not Present

tag-Config

Not Present

phr-Config

Not Present

}

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not Present

rlf-TimersAndConstants

Not Present

}

8.2.2.1.2 SRB3 Establishment, Reconfiguration and Release / NR addition, modification and release / NR-DC

8.2.2.1.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to establish SRB3 }

then { UE establishes SRB3 and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and SRB3 configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on SRB3 to reconfigure NR MAC of the SCG }

then { UE reconfigures NR MAC and sends RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3 }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and SRB3 configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on SRB3 to reestablish NR PDCP of the SCG }

then { UE reestablishes NR PDCP and sends RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3 }

}

(4)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and SRB3 configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to release SRB3 }

then { UE releases SRB3 and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 }

}

8.2.2.1.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.1, 5.3.5.5.3, 5.3.5.5.4, 5.3.5.5.8, 5.3.5.5.9, 5.3.5.6.1, 5.3.5.6.2 and 5.3.5.6.3. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to nr-SCG:

3> include in the nr-SCG-Response the RRCReconfigurationComplete message;

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received within the nr-SCG within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup (UE in NR-DC, mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup was received in RRCReconfiguration via SRB1):

2> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig in nr-SCG:

3> initiate the Random Access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

2> else

3> the procedure ends;

NOTE 2a: The order in which the UE sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received via SRB3 (UE in NR-DC):

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

1> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1):

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

1> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG or SCG, and when MAC of an NR cell group successfully completes a Random Access procedure triggered above;

2> stop timer T304 for that cell group;

2> apply the parts of the CSI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell, if any;

2> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of that target SpCell;

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.1]

In (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC, SRB3 can be used for measurement configuration and reporting, to (re-)configure MAC, RLC, physical layer and RLF timers and constants of the SCG configuration, and to reconfigure PDCP for DRBs associated with the S-KgNB or SRB3, and to reconfigure SDAP for DRBs associated with S-KgNB in (NG)EN-DC and NR-DC, provided that the (re-)configuration does not require any MN involvement. In EN-DC, only measConfig, radioBearerConfig and/or secondaryCellGroup are included in RRCReconfiguration received via SRB3.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.1]

The UE performs the following actions based on a received CellGroupConfig IE:

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the rlc-BearerToReleaseList:

2> perform RLC bearer release as specified in 5.3.5.5.3;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the rlc-BearerToAddModList:

2> perform the RLC bearer addition/modification as specified in 5.3.5.5.4;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the mac-CellGroupConfig:

2> configure the MAC entity of this cell group as specified in 5.3.5.5.5;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the sCellToReleaseList:

2> perform SCell release as specified in 5.3.5.5.8;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the sCellToAddModList:

2> perform SCell addition/modification as specified in 5.3.5.5.9.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.3]

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value included in the rlc-BearerToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (LCH release); or

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value that is to be released as the result of an SCG release according to 5.3.5.4:

2> release the RLC entity or entities as specified in TS 38.322 [4, clause 5.1.3];

2> release the corresponding logical channel.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.4]

For each RLC-Bearer-Config received in the rlc-BearerToAddModList IE the UE shall:

1> if the UE’s current configuration contains a RLC bearer with the received logicalChannelIdentity:

2> reconfigure the RLC entity or entities in accordance with the received rlc-Config;

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.8]

The UE shall:

1> if the release is triggered by reception of the sCellToReleaseList:

2> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToReleaseList:

3> if the current UE configuration includes an SCell with value sCellIndex:

4> release the SCell.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.5.9]

The UE shall:

1> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SCell addition):

2> add the SCell, corresponding to the sCellIndex, in accordance with the sCellConfigCommon and sCellConfigDedicated;

2> configure lower layers to consider the SCell to be in deactivated state;

1> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (SCell modification):

2> modify the SCell configuration in accordance with the sCellConfigDedicated.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.6.1]

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb3-ToRelease and set to true:

2> perform the SRB release as specified in 5.3.5.6.2;

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb-ToAddModList:

2> perform the SRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.3;

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.6.2]

The UE shall:

1> release the PDCP entity of the SRB3.

[TS 38.331, 5.3.5.6.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment or reconfiguration from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

8.2.2.1.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.1.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 10 is the PSCell

– System information combination NR-4 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.2 is used in NR cells.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– The UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC) and NR-DC bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) according to TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.5.1-1.

8.2.2.1.2.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message via SRB1 to establish SRB3.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1?

–>

NR RRC: RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message via SRB3 to reconfigure NR MAC.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

4

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3?

–>

NR RRC: RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

5

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message via SRB3 to reconfigure PDCP.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

6

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3?

–>

NR RRC: RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message via SRB1 to release SRB3.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1?

–>

NR RRC: RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

4

P

8.2.2.1.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

RRCReconfiguration-SCG

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-2

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB3

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-2: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-3

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-3: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

CellGroupId as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-20 with condition NR-DC_SCG

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-Bearer-Config[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148 with condition SRB3

entry 1

}

mac-CellGroupConfig

Not Present

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not Present

spCellConfig

Not Present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-3A: RRCReconfigurationComplete (Steps 2/8, Table 4.5.4.2-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-14 with condition NR-SCG

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step 3, Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-5

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-5: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

CellGroupId as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-20 with condition NR-DC_SCG

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Not present

rlc-BearerToReleaseList

Not present

mac-CellGroupConfig

MAC-CellGroupConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-68 with condition DRX

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not present

spCellConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-6: RRCReconfiguration (step 5, Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

RadioBearerConfig

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-7

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-7: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB3

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

reestablishPDCP

true

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-8: Void

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-9: RRCReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd

true

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

RRCReconfiguration-SCG

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-10

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-11

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-10: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-9)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-12

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-11: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-10)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb3-ToRelease

true

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-12: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.1.2.3.3-10)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Not Present

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

1 entry

logicalChannelIdentity[1]

LogicalChannelIdentity as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-67 with condition SRB3

entry 1

}

}

8.2.2.2 Split SRB Establishment and Release

8.2.2.2.1 Split SRB Establishment and Release / EN-DC

8.2.2.2.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message on SRB1 to configure split SRB1 and split SRB2 with PDCP duplication activated }

then { UE configures the split SRBs and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 with the PDCP PDU duplicated on the MCG and SCG path }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG and split SRB configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message on split SRB1 over the SCG path to release split SRB1 and split SRB2 }

then { UE releases split SRB1 and split SRB2 and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path}

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in EN-DC mode with split SRB1 and split SRB2 configured with PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives a CounterCheck on split SRB1 over the SCG path }

then { UE replies with CounterCheckResponse on split SRB1 duplicated on the MCG and SCG path}

}

(4)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in EN-DC mode with split SRB1 and split SRB2 configured with PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives a IDENTITY REQUEST on split SRB2 over the SCG path }

then { UE replies with IDENTITY RESPONSE on split SRB2 duplicated on the MCG and SCG path}

8.2.2.2.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3 and TS 38.331: clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.3, 5.3.5.6.1 and 5.3.5.6.3. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete via the E-UTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value included in the rlc-BearerToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (LCH release); or

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value that is to be released as the result of an SCG release according to 5.3.5.4:

2> release the RLC entity or entities as specified in TS 38.322 [4], clause 5.1.3;

2> release the corresponding logical channel

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.1]

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb-ToAddModList:

2> perform the SRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.3;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment or reconfiguration from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP):

2> establish a PDCP entity;

2> if AS security has been activated:

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the security algorithms and keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> else:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the current UE configuration as configured by E-UTRA in TS 36.331 [10] includes an SRB identified with the same srb-Identity value:

3> associate the E-UTRA RLC entity and DCCH of this SRB with the NR PDCP entity;

3> release the E-UTRA PDCP entity of this SRB;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> else:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the default configuration defined in 9.2.1 for the corresponding SRB;

8.2.2.2.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.2.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– The UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.2.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

0

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB1.

1

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to configure split SRB1 and split SRB2.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 2 the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2 is taking place.

2

Check: Does the UE send a RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

2A

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB1 and the last message received in step 2 is acknowledged.

2B

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB1.

3

SS transmits CounterCheck message for NR capabilities on split SRB1 over the SCG path.

<–

CounterCheck

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 4 the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-3 is taking place.

4

Check: Does the UE send CounterCheckResponse message including UE radio access capability information for NR on split SRB1 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

CounterCheckResponse

3

P

4A

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-3 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB1 and the last message received in step 4 is acknowledged.

4B

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB2.

4C

The SS sends DLInformationTransfer message (carrying IDENTITY REQUEST message) on split SRB2 over the SCG path.

<–

DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY REQUEST)

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 4B the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-4 is taking place.

4D

Check: Does the UE send the ULInformationTransfer message (carrying IDENTITY RESPONSE message) on split SRB2 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

ULInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE)

4

P

4E

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-4 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB2 and the last message received in step 4D is acknowledged.

5

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message on split SRB1 to release split SRB1 and split SRB2 over the SCG path.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

6

Check: Does the UE send RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path?

Note: The SS makes sure that the UE does not send any message on the SCG path.

The SS sends the RLC ACK for this message.

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path/E-UTRA Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-3: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an CounterCheckResponse message on SRB1 over the MCG path/E-UTRA Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

CounterCheckResponse

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-4: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE) message on SRB2 over the MCG path/E-UTRA Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE)

8.2.2.2.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1 Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 with condition MCG_and_SCG and condition HO

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-1a

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING containing RRCReconfiguration-SplitSRB

As per Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-1

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING containing RadioBearerConfig-SplitSRB

As per Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-4

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-1a: MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell (Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.5-1

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

MobilityControlInfo-HO ::= SEQUENCE {

targetPhysCellId

PhysicalCellIdentity of E-UTRA Cell 1

carrierFreq

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-2: RRCReconfiguration-SplitSRB (Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC_HO

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-SplitSRB

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-3: CellGroupConfig-SplitSRB (Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

2 entries

RLC-BearerConfig[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

logicalChannelIdentity

1

servedRadioBearer CHOICE {

srb-Identity

1

}

reestablishRLC

Not present

RLC-Config

Not present.

mac-LogicalChannelConfig

Not present

}

RLC-BearerConfig[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 2

logicalChannelIdentity

2

servedRadioBearer CHOICE {

srb-Identity

2

}

reestablishRLC

Not present

RLC-Config

Not present

mac-LogicalChannelConfig

Not present

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-4: RadioBearerConfig-SplitSRB (step 1, Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

2 entries

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

srb-Identity

1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config-SRB with condition SRB1

}

SRB-ToAddMod[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 2

srb-Identity

2

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config-SRB with condition SRB2

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-5: PDCP-Config-SRB (Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split_SRB

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

logicalChannel

1

SRB1

logicalChannel

2

SRB2

}

pdcp-Duplication

TRUE

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-6: Void

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-7: RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (steps 2, 6, Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-9

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

scg-ConfigResponseNR-r15

Present

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-8: CounterCheck (step 3, Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-0a

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CounterCheck ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

countercheck-r8 SEQUENCE {

drb-CountMSB-InfoList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-CountMSB-Info {

2 entries

DRB-CountMSB-Info[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRBn

MCG DRB identity

countMSB-Uplink

0

countMSB-Downlink

0

}

DRB-CountMSB-Info[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 2

drb-Identity

DRB2

SCG DRB identity

countMSB-Uplink

0

countMSB-Downlink

0

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-9: CounterCheckResponse (step 4, Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-0b

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CounterCheckResponse ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

counterCheckResponse-r8 SEQUENCE {

drb-CountInfoList SEQUENCE (SIZE (0..maxDRB)) OF DRB-CountInfo {

2 entries

DRB-CountInfo[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity with Condition DRBn

MCG DRB identity as sent in Step 3

count-Uplink

Not checked

count-Downlink

Not checked

}

DRB-CountInfo[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 2

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity with Condition DRB2

SCG DRB

count-Uplink

Not checked

count-Downlink

Not checked

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-10: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 5, Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.2-2)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 condition MCG_and_split

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

RRCReconfiguration-SplitSRBRelease

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-11: RRCReconfigurationSplitSRBRelease (Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-10)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-SplitSRB-Release

measConfig

Not Present

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-12: CellGroupConfig-SplitSRB-Release (Table 8.2.2.2.1.3.3-11)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

2 entries

logicalChannelIdentity[1]

1

entry 1

logicalChannelIdentity[2]

2

entry 2

}

}

8.2.2.2.2 Split SRB Establishment and Release / NR-DC

8.2.2.2.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on SRB1 to configure split SRB1 and split SRB2 with PDCP duplication activated }

then { UE configures the split SRBs and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 with the PDCP PDU duplicated on the MCG and SCG path }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and split SRB configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on split SRB1 over the SCG path to release split SRB1 and split SRB2 }

then { UE releases split SRB1 and split SRB2 and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path}

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in NR-DC mode with split SRB1 and split SRB2 configured with PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives a CounterCheck on split SRB1 over the SCG path }

then { UE replies with CounterCheckResponse on split SRB1 duplicated on the MCG and SCG path}

}

(4)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in NR-DC mode with split SRB1 and split SRB2 configured with PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives a IDENTITY REQUEST on split SRB2 over the SCG path }

then { UE replies with IDENTITY RESPONSE on split SRB2 duplicated on the MCG and SCG path}

8.2.2.2.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 38.331 clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.3, 5.3.5.6.1 and 5.3.5.6.3. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO, CPA or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to eutra-SCG:

4> perform the RRC connection reconfiguration as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.3.5.3 for the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included in eutra-SCG;

2> else (mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to release):

3> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received via SRB1 within the nr-SCG within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup (UE in NR-DC, mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup was received in RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume via SRB1):

2> if the RRCReconfiguration is applied due to a conditional reconfiguration execution for CPC which is configured via conditionalReconfiguration contained in nr-SCG within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup:

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via the NR MCG embedded in NR RRC message ULInformationTransferMRDC as specified in clause 5.7.2a.3.

2> if the scg-State is not included in the RRCReconfiguration or RRCResume message containing the RRCReconfiguration message:

3> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig in nr-SCG; or

3> if the SCG was deactivated before the reception of the NR RRC message containing the RRCReconfiguration message and lower layers consider that a Random Access procedure is needed for SCG activation:

4> initiate the Random Access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

3> else:

4> the procedure ends;

2> else

3> the procedure ends;

NOTE 2a: The order in which the UE sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received via SRB3 (UE in NR-DC):

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message was received within DLInformationTransferMRDC:

3> if the RRCReconfiguration message was received within the nr-SCG within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup (NR SCG RRC Reconfiguration):

4> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig in nr-SCG:

5> initiate the Random Access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

4> else:

5> the procedure ends;

3> else:

4> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

2> else:

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

1> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1):

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

2> if this is the first RRCReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC re-establishment procedure:

3> resume SRB2, SRB4, and DRBs, multicast MRB, and BH RLC channels for IAB-MT, that are suspended;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value included in the rlc-BearerToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (LCH release); or

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value that is to be released as the result of an SCG release according to 5.3.5.4:

2> release the RLC entity or entities as specified in TS 38.322 [4], clause 5.1.3;

2> release the corresponding logical channel

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.1]

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb-ToAddModList:

2> perform the SRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.3;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment or reconfiguration from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP):

2> establish a PDCP entity;

2> if AS security has been activated:

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the security algorithms and keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> else:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the current UE configuration as configured by E-UTRA in TS 36.331 [10] includes an SRB identified with the same srb-Identity value:

3> associate the E-UTRA RLC entity and DCCH of this SRB with the NR PDCP entity;

3> release the E-UTRA PDCP entity of this SRB;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> else:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the default configuration defined in 9.2.1 for the corresponding SRB;

8.2.2.2.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.2.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 2 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– The UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.2.2.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB1.

2

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG to configure split SRB1 and split SRB2.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 3 the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-2 is taking place.

3

Check: Does the UE send a RRCReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

4

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-2 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB1 and the last message received in step 3 is acknowledged.

5

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB1.

6

SS transmits CounterCheck message for capabilities on split SRB1 over the SCG path.

<–

CounterCheck

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 7 the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-3 is taking place.

7

Check: Does the UE send CounterCheckResponse message including UE radio access capability information on split SRB1 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

CounterCheckResponse

3

P

8

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-3 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB1 and the last message received in step 7 is acknowledged.

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 9 the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-4 is taking place.

9

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB2.

10

The SS sends DLInformationTransfer message (carrying IDENTITY REQUEST message) on split SRB2 over the SCG path.

<–

DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY REQUEST)

11

Check: Does the UE send the ULInformationTransfer message (carrying IDENTITY RESPONSE message) on split SRB2 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

ULInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE)

4

P

12

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-4 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB2 and the last message received in step 10 is acknowledged.

13

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message message on split SRB1 to release split SRB1 and split SRB2 over the SCG path.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

14

Check: Does the UE send RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path?

Note: The SS makes sure that the UE does not send any message on the SCG path.

The SS sends the RLC ACK for this message.

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-2: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path/Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-3: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an CounterCheckResponse message on SRB1 over the MCG path/ Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

CounterCheckResponse

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-4: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE) message on SRB2 over the MCG path/ Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE)

8.2.2.2.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-1, Step 2 and Step 13)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

RadioBearerConfig

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-2

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

RRCReconfiguration-SCG

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-5

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

Not present

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-2: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB1

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

2 entries

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

SRB-Identity

SRB-Identity with condition SRB1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config-SRB1

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-3

}

SRB-ToAddMod[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 2

SRB-Identity

SRB-Identity with condition SRB2

reestablishPDCP

Not present

discardOnPDCP

Not present

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config-SRB2

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-4

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-3: PDCP-Config-SRB1 (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split_SRB

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC

Not present

Step 13

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

Step 2

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

logicalChannel

1

}

pdcp-Duplication

true

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-4: PDCP-Config-SRB2 (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split_SRB

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC

Not present

Step 13

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

Step 2

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

logicalChannel

2

}

pdcp-Duplication

true

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-5: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-SCG

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-6

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-6: CellGroupConfig-SCG (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Not present

Step 13

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLCH)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

2 entries

Step 2

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig with condition SRB1 and AM

entry 1

RLC-BearerConfig[2]

RLC-BearerConfig with condition SRB2 and AM

entry 2

}

rlc-BearerToReleaseList

Not present

Step 2

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

2 entries

Step 13

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

1

LogicalChannelIdentity[2]

2

}

mac-CellGroupConfig

Not present

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not present

spCellConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-7: RRCReconfigurationComplete (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-1, step 3 and 14, Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-2, step 1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4] Table 4.6.1-14 with condition NR-DC

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-8: CounterCheck (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-1, Step 6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.1-1

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CounterCheck ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

counterCheck SEQUENCE {

drb-CountMSB-InfoList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-CountMSB-Info {

2 entries

DRB-CountMSB-Info[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity of DRBn

DRBn is the MCG DRB established in preamble

countMSB-Uplink

0

countMSB-Downlink

0

}

DRB-CountMSB-Info[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 2

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity of DRBj

DRBj is the SCG DRB established in preamble

countMSB-Uplink

0

countMSB-Downlink

0

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.3-9: CounterCheckResponse (Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-1, Step 7, Table 8.2.2.2.2.3.2-3, Step 1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-2

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CounterCheckResponse ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

counterCheckResponse SEQUENCE {

drb-CountInfoList SEQUENCE (SIZE (0..maxDRB)) OF DRB-CountInfo {

2 entries

DRB-CountInfo[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity of DRBn

DRBn is the MCG DRB established in preamble

count-Uplink

Not checked

count-Downlink

Not checked

}

DRB-CountInfo[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity of DRBj

DRBj is the SCG DRB established in preamble

count-Uplink

Not checked

count-Downlink

Not checked

}

}

}

}

}

8.2.2.2.3 Split SRB Establishment and Release / NE-DC

8.2.2.2.3.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on SRB1 to configure split SRB1 and split SRB2 with PDCP duplication activated }

then { UE configures the split SRBs and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 with the PDCP PDU duplicated on the MCG and SCG path }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC and split SRB configured }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on split SRB1 over the SCG path to release split SRB1 and split SRB2 }

then { UE releases split SRB1 and split SRB2 and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path}

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in NE-DC mode with split SRB1 and split SRB2 configured with PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives a CounterCheck on split SRB1 over the SCG path }

then { UE replies with CounterCheckResponse on split SRB1 duplicated on the MCG and SCG path}

}

(4)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in NE-DC mode with split SRB1 and split SRB2 configured with PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives a IDENTITY REQUEST on split SRB2 over the SCG path }

then { UE replies with IDENTITY RESPONSE on split SRB2 duplicated on the MCG and SCG path}

8.2.2.2.3.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3 and TS 36.331: clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.10.1a and 5.3.10.17. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO, CPA or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to eutra-SCG:

4> perform the RRC connection reconfiguration as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.3.5.3 for the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included in eutra-SCG;

2> else (mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to release):

3> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:…

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to eutra-SCG:

3> include in the eutra-SCG-Response the E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message in accordance with TS 36.331 [10] clause 5.3.5.3;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the UE is configured with NE-DC:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message was included in an NR RRCResume message:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCResumeComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.13.4;

2> else:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> else:

2> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.10.1a]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModListSCG that is not part of the current UE E-UTRA SCG configuration (i.e. SCG RLC bearer establishment):

2> apply the specified configuration defined in 9.1.2 for the corresponding SRB;

2> establish an (SCG) RLC entity in accordance with the received rlc-Config;

2> establish a (SCG) DCCH logical channel in accordance with the received logicalChannelConfig and with the logical channel identity set in accordance with 9.1.2;

2> if the UE is configured with DC:

3> associate the established SCG RLC bearer and DCCH logical channel with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

3> configure the E-UTRA PDCP entity to activate duplication with t-Reordering set to infinity;

2> else (i.e. the UE is configured with NE-DC):

3> associate the SCG RLC bearer and DCCH logical channel with the NR PDCP entity, i.e. as configured by NR see TS 38.331 [82], identified with the same srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModListSCG that is part of the current UE SCG configuration (SCG RLC bearer reconfiguration):

2> re-establish the SCG RLC entity, if reestablishRLC is included;

2> reconfigure the RLC entity in accordance with the received rlc-Config;

2> reconfigure the DCCH logical channel in accordance with the received logicalChannelConfig;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.17]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in srb-ToReleaseList or in srb-ToReleaseListSCG that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if the SRB configuration does not include an E-UTRA PDCP entity (release the SCG RLC bearer configuration):

3> re-establish the RLC entity as specified in TS 36.322 [7] for this SRB;

3> configure the E-UTRA PDCP entity to deactivate duplication;

2> release the RLC entity or entities;

2> release the DCCH logical channel;

2> if srb-Identity value is set to 4, release the PDCP entity;

8.2.2.2.3.3 Test description

8.2.2.2.3.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– The UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NE-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.2.3.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

0

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB1.

1

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing Eutra RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to configure split SRB1 and split SRB2.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 2 the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-2 is taking place.

2

Check: Does the UE send a RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing Eutra RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

2A

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-2 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB1 and the last message received in step 2 is acknowledged.

2B

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB1.

3

SS transmits CounterCheck message for E-UTRA capabilities on split SRB1 over the SCG path.

<–

CounterCheck

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 4 the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-3 is taking place.

4

Check: Does the UE send CounterCheckResponse message including UE radio access capability information for E-UTRA on split SRB1 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

CounterCheckResponse

3

P

4A

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-3 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB1 and the last message received in step 4 is acknowledged.

4B

The SS is configured not to send RLC ACK on split SRB2.

4C

The SS sends DLInformationTransfer message (carrying IDENTITY REQUEST message) on split SRB2 over the SCG path.

<–

DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY REQUEST)

EXCEPTION: In parallel to the event described in step 4B the steps specified in Table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-4 is taking place.

4D

Check: Does the UE send the ULInformationTransfer message (carrying IDENTITY RESPONSE message) on split SRB2 duplicated over the SCG path?

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

ULInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE)

4

P

4E

After steps in table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-4 are completed the SS is configured to send RLC ACK on split SRB2 and the last message received in step 4D is acknowledged.

5

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing Eutra RRCConnectionReconfiguration message on split SRB1 to release split SRB1 and split SRB2 over the SCG path.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

6

Check: Does the UE send RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing Eutra RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path?

Note: The SS makes sure that the UE does not send any message on the SCG path.

The SS sends the RLC ACK for this message.

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

Table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-2: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path/NR Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

Table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-3: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an CounterCheckResponse message on SRB1 over the MCG path/NR Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

CounterCheckResponse

Table 8.2.2.2.3.3.2-4: Parallel behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The UE transmits an DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE) message on SRB2 over the MCG path/NR Cell 1

Note: The UE RLC might re-transmit this message several times (no more than maxRetxThreshold) until RLC ACK is sent by the SS.

–>

DLInformationTransfer

(IDENTITY RESPONSE)

8.2.2.2.3.3.3 Specific message contents

FFS

8.2.2.3 Simultaneous SRB3 and Split SRB / Sequential message flow on SRB3 and Split SRB

8.2.2.3.1 Simultaneous SRB3 and Split SRB / Sequential message flow on SRB3 and Split SRB with one UL path / EN-DC

8.2.2.3.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED state in EN-DC mode with SRB3 and split SRB1 configured with no PDCP duplication}

ensure that {

when { UE receives RRCReconfiguration message on SRB3 to modify SCG DRB }

then { UE sends RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3 over the SCG path }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in EN-DC mode with SRB3 and split SRB1 configured with no PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message on split SRB1 on the SCG path to release SRB3 }

then { UE releases SRB3 and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 over the MCG path }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in EN-DC mode with split SRB1 configured with no PDCP duplication}

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to release split SRB1 on SCG path }

then { UE releases split SRB1 and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path }

}

8.2.2.3.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 37.340, clause 7.6, TS 36.331, clauses 5.3.5.3 and TS 38.331:5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5, 5.3.5.5.3, 5.3.5.6, 5.3.5.6.2 and 5.3.5.6.3. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 37.340, clause 7.6]

Split SRB is supported for both SRB1 and SRB2 (split SRB is not supported for SRB0 and SRB3) in all MR-DC cases. RRC PDUs on split SRB are ciphered and integrity protected using NR PDCP.

Split SRB can be configured by the MN in Secondary Node Addition and/or Modification procedure, with SN configuration part provided by the SN. A UE can be configured with both split SRB and SRB3 simultaneously. SRB3 and the SCG leg of split SRB can be independently configured.

For the split SRB, the selection of transmission path in downlink depends on network implementation. For uplink, the UE is configured via MN RRC signalling whether to use MCG path or duplicate the transmission on both MCG and SCG.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10].

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value included in the rlc-BearerToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (LCH release); or

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value that is to be released as the result of an SCG release according to 5.3.5.4:

2> release the RLC entity or entities as specified in TS 38.322 [4] clause 5.1.3;

2> release the corresponding logical channel.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.1

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb-ToAddModList:

2> perform the SRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.3;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment or reconfiguration from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB( as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the current UE configuration as configured by E-UTRA in TS 36.331 includes an SRB identified with the same srb-Identity value:

3> associate the E-UTRA RLC entity and DCCH of this SRB with the NR PDCP entity;

3> release the E-UTRA PDCP entity of this SRB;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> else:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the default configuration defined in 9.2.1 for the corresponding SRB;

8.2.2.3.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.3.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell.

– System Information combination as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.1 is used in E-UTRA Cell 1 and NR Cell 1.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– The UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.3.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits on SRB1 over MCG path/E-UTRA Cell 1 an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to configure SRB3, to reconfigure SRB1 to split SRB1 without PDCP duplication and to reconfigure SRB2 to change the PDCP type from EUTRA PDCP to NR PDCP.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

2

UE transmits an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 over the MCG path/EUTRA Cell 1.

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

3

The SS transmits on SRB3/SCG an NR RRCReconfiguration message to reconfigure SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

4

Check: Does the UE transmit an NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3/NR Cell 1?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

5

The SS transmits over split SRB1 SCG path/NR Cell 1 an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to release SRB3.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

Void

6

Check: Does the UE transmits an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 over the MCG path/EUTRA Cell 1?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete(RRCReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to release SRB1 over SCG path/NR Cell 1.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

8

Check: Does the UE transmits an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path/E-UTRA Cell 1?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

3

P

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.2-2: Void

8.2.2.3.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1E

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup according table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1A

}

}

sk-Counter-r15

Increment the value by 1 from the previous value

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig according TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with conditions EN-DC_DRB and Re-establish_PDCP and SRB3

nr-RadioBearerConfig2-r15

RadioBearerConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1C

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1A: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1B.

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1B: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1A)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition EN-DC and PSCell_change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

3 entries

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-148 with condition SRB1 and Re-establish_RLC

entry 1

RLC-BearerConfig[2]

RLC-BearerConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-148 with condition SRB3

entry 2

RLC-BearerConfig[3]

RLC-BearerConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-148 with conditions AM and DRB2 and Re-establish_RLC

entry 3

}

mac-LogicalChannelConfig

LogicalChannelConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.3-66

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1C: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1[4] table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

srb-Identity

LogicalChannelIdentity with condition SRB1

reestablishPDCP

true

discardOnPDCP

Not present

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config according to table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1D

srb-Identity[2]

LogicalChannelIdentity with condition SRB2

reestablishPDCP[2]

true

discardOnPDCP[2]

Not present

pdcp-Config[2]

Not present

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1D: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1C)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1[4] table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split_SRB

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1E: MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.5-1

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

MobilityControlInfo-HO ::= SEQUENCE {

targetPhysCellId

PhysicalCellIdentity of E-UTRA Cell 1

carrierFreq

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-2: Void

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-3: Void

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step 3, Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfigaccording to table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-5.

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-5: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

mac-CellGroupConfig

MAC-CellGroupConfig according to table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-5a

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-5A: MAC-CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-68

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

MAC-CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

bsr-Config SEQUENCE {

periodicBSR-Timer

sf5

retxBSR-Timer

sf40

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-6: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 5, Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING containing RRCReconfiguration according to Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-8.

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

RadioBearerConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-7.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-7: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList

Not present

srb3-ToRelease

true

drb-ToAddModList

Not present

drb-ToReleaseList

Not present

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-8: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to table 8.2.2.1.1.3.3-9.

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-9: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Not present

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

1 entry

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

3

entry 1

}

mac-CellGroupConfig

Not present

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not present

sCellToAddModList

Not present

sCellToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxNrofSCells)) OF SCellIndex {

1 entry

SCellIndex[1]

SCellIndex

entry 1

NR Cell 1

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-10: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 with condition HO-TO-EUTRA

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-1E

radioResourceConfigDedicated SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

SRB-ToAddMod[1]

SRB-ToAddMod-DEFAULT using condition SRB1

entry 1

See TS 36.508 [7] subclause 4.8.2

}

}

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING containing RRCReconfigurationaccording to Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-11

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

Not present

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-11: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.2-10)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-12.

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-12: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.1.3.3-11)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

1

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

1 entry

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

1

entry 1

}

}

8.2.2.3.2 Simultaneous SRB3 and Split SRB / Sequential message flow on SRB3 and Split SRB with one UL path / NR-DC

8.2.2.3.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state in NR-DC mode with SRB3 and split SRB1 configured with no PDCP duplication}

ensure that {

when { UE receives RRCReconfiguration message on SRB3 to modify SCG DRB }

then { UE sends RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3 over the SCG path }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in NR-DC mode with SRB3 and split SRB1 configured with no PDCP duplication }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message on split SRB1 on the SCG path to release SRB3 }

then { UE releases SRB3 and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 over the MCG path }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state in NR-DC mode with split SRB1 configured with no PDCP duplication}

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to release split SRB1 on SCG path }

then { UE releases split SRB1 and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path }

}

8.2.2.3.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 37.340, clause 7.6 and TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.3, 5.3.5.5.4, 5.3.5.6.1, 5.3.5.6.3. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 37.340, clause 7.6]

Split SRB is supported for both SRB1 and SRB2 (split SRB is not supported for SRB0 and SRB3) in all MR-DC cases. RRC PDUs on split SRB are ciphered and integrity protected using NR PDCP.

Split SRB can be configured by the MN in Secondary Node Addition and/or Modification procedure, with SN configuration part provided by the SN. A UE can be configured with both split SRB and SRB3 simultaneously. SRB3 and the SCG leg of split SRB can be independently configured.

For the split SRB, the selection of transmission path in downlink depends on network implementation. For uplink, the UE is configured via MN RRC signalling whether to use MCG path or duplicate the transmission on both MCG and SCG.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the received masterCellGroup according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterKeyUpdate:

2> perform AS security key update procedure as specified in 5.3.5.7;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the sk-Counter:

2> perform security key update procedure as specified in 5.3.5.7;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig2:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to nr-SCG:

3> include in the nr-SCG-Response the RRCReconfigurationComplete message;

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received within the nr-SCG within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup (UE in NR-DC, mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup was received in RRCReconfiguration via SRB1):

2> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig in nr-SCG:

3> initiate the Random Access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

2> else

3> the procedure ends;

NOTE 2a: The order in which the UE sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received via SRB3 (UE in NR-DC):

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

1> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1):

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

2> if this is the first RRCReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC re-establishment procedure:

3> resume SRB2 and DRBs that are suspended;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value included in the rlc-BearerToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (LCH release); or

1> for each logicalChannelIdentity value that is to be released as the result of an SCG release according to 5.3.5.4:

2> release the RLC entity or entities as specified in TS 38.322 [4] clause 5.1.3;

2> release the corresponding logical channel.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.4]

For each RLC-BearerConfig received in the rlc-BearerToAddModList IE the UE shall:

1> if the UE’s current configuration contains an RLC bearer with the received logicalChannelIdentity within the same cell group:

2> if reestablishRLC is received:

3> re-establish the RLC entity as specified in TS 38.322 [4];

2> reconfigure the RLC entity or entities in accordance with the received rlc-Config;

2> reconfigure the logical channel in accordance with the received mac-LogicalChannelConfig;

NOTE: The network does not re-associate an already configured logical channel with another radio bearer. Hence servedRadioBearer is not present in this case.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.1

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the srb-ToAddModList:

2> perform the SRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.3;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment or reconfiguration from NR PDCP to NR PDCP):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB( as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the current UE configuration as configured by NR in TS 36.331 includes an SRB identified with the same srb-Identity value:

3> associate the NR RLC entity and DCCH of this SRB with the NR PDCP entity;

3> release the NR PDCP entity of this SRB;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> else:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the default configuration defined in 9.2.1 for the corresponding SRB;

8.2.2.3.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.3.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 10 is the PSCell.

– System information combination NR-4 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.2 is used in NR cells.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– The UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.3.2.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits on SRB1 over MCG path/NR Cell 1 an RRCReconfiguration message to configure SRB3 and reconfigure SRB1 to split SRB without PDCP duplication.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

2

UE transmits an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 over the MCG path/NR Cell 1.

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

The SS transmits on SRB3/SCG an NR RRCReconfiguration message to reconfigure SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

4

Check: Does the UE transmit an NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB3/NR Cell 10?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

5

The SS transmits over split SRB1 SCG path/NR Cell 10 an RRCReconfiguration message to release SRB3.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

6

Check: Does the UE transmits an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on split SRB1 over the MCG path/NR Cell 1?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message to release SRB1 over SCG path/NR Cell 10.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmits an RRCReconfigurationComplete message on SRB1 over the MCG path/NR Cell 1?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

8.2.2.3.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

OCTET STRING containing RadioBearerConfig given in Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-4

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING containing the RRCReconfiguration given in Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-2

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING containing the RadioBearerConfig specified in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB3

sk-Counter

Increment the value by 1 from the previous value

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-2: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with Condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig given in Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-3

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-3: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

2+n entries

n is the number of established SCG DRBs. Value of n depends on TTCN implementation

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-148 with condition SRB1 and Re-establish_RLC

entry 1

RLC-BearerConfig[2]

RLC-BearerConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-148 with condition SRB3

entry 2

RLC-BearerConfig[2+k: k=1..n]

RLC-BearerConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-148 with conditions AM and DRBk and Re-establish_RLC

entry 2+k

}

mac-LogicalChannelConfig

LogicalChannelConfig according to 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.3-66

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-4: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1[4] table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB_NR_PDCP and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

2 entries

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

SRB1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config according to TS 38.508-1[4] table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split_SRB

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-5: RRCReconfiguration (step 3, Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig given in Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-6

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-6: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

mac-CellGroupConfig

MAC-CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-7

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-7: MAC-CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-68

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

MAC-CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

bsr-Config SEQUENCE {

periodicBSR-Timer

sf5

retxBSR-Timer

sf40

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-8: RRCReconfiguration (step 5, Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING containing RRCReconfiguration according to Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-10

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-9

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-9: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList

Not present

srb3-ToRelease

true

drb-ToAddModList

Not present

drb-ToReleaseList

Not present

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-10: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-11

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-11: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-10)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList

Not present

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

1 entry

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

3

entry 1

}

mac-CellGroupConfig

Not present

physicalCellGroupConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-12: RRCReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

OCTET STRING containing RadioBearerConfig according Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-13

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING containing RRCReconfiguration according to Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-14

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

Not present

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-13: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-12)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4] Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB1

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

reestablishPDCP

true

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config with condition SRB

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-14: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-12)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

OCTET STRING containing CellGroupConfig according to Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-15

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-15: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.3.2.3.3-14)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

1 entry

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

1

entry 1

}

}

8.2.2.4 PSCell addition, modification and release / SCG DRB

8.2.2.4.1 PSCell addition, modification and release / SCG DRB / EN-DC

8.2.2.4.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED state }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to add PSCell with SCG DRB }

then { UE configures the PSCell with SCG DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB }

then {UE reconfigures the SCG DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to release PSCell with SCG DRB }

then { UE releases the PSCell and SCG DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.4.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3, TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.7, 5.3.5.6.4 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-Config and it is set to release: or

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes endc-ReleaseAndAdd and it is set to TRUE:

2> perform ENDC release as specified in TS38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.10;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the sk-Counter:

2> perform key update procedure as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.7;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes perCC-GapIndicationRequest:

3> include perCC-GapIndicationList and numFreqEffective;

2> if the frequencies are configured for reduced measurement performance:

3> include numFreqEffectiveReduced;

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> set the content of RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent, or;

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent:

3> include the uplinkTxDirectCurrentList;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> construct RRCReconfigurationComplete message and submit it via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10].

3> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an SCG:

4> initiate the random access procedure on the SpCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

3> else:

4> the procedure ends;

NOTE: The order the UE sends the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

2> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB3):

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration.

NOTE:For EN-DC, in the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB1, the random access is triggered by RRC layer itself as there is not necessarily other UL transmission. In the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB3, the random access is triggered by the MAC layer due to arrival of RRCReconfigurationComplete.

1 > else:

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

2> if this is the first RRCReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC re-establishment procedure:

3> resume SRB2 and DRBs that are suspended;

1> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG or SCG, and when MAC of an NR cell group successfully completes a random access procedure triggered above;

2> stop timer T304 for that cell group;

2> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell, if any;

2> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of that target SpCell;

2> if the reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG::

3> if T390 is running:

4> stop timer T390 for all access categories;

4> perform the actions as specified in 5.3.14.4.

3> if RRCReconfiguration does not include dedicatedSIB1-Delivery and

3> if the active downlink BWP, which is indicated by the firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id for the target SpCell of the MCG, has a common search space configured by searchSpaceSIB1:

4> acquire the SIB1, which is scheduled as specified in TS 38.213 [13], of the target SpCell of the MCG;

4> upon acquiring SIB1, perform the actions specified in clause 5.2.2.4.2;

2> the procedure ends;

NOTE: The UE is only required to acquire broadcasted SIB1 if the UE can acquire it without disrupting unicast data reception, i.e. the broadcast and unicast beams are quasi co-located.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.7]

The UE shall:

1> if the SpCellConfig contains spCellConfigDedicated:

2> configure the SpCell in accordance with the spCellConfigDedicated;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active uplink bandwidth part;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active downlink bandwidth part;

2> if the any of the reference signal(s) that are used for radio link monitoring are reconfigured by the received spCellConfigDedicated:

3> stop timer T310 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> reset the counters N310 and N311.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.4]

Editor’s Note: FFS / TODO: Add handling for the new QoS concept (mapping of flows; configuration of QFI-to-DRB mapping; reflective QoS…) but keep also EPS-Bearer handling for the EN-DC case

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuratio; orn:

1> for each drb-Identity value that is to be released as the result of full configuration according to 5.3.5.11:

2> release the PDCP entity and the drb-Identity;

2> if SDAP entity associated with this DRB is configured:

3> indicate the release of the DRB to SDAP entity associated with this DRB (TS 37.324 24[] clause 5.3.3);

2> if the UE is operating in EN-DC:

3> if a new bearer is not added either with NR or E-UTRA with same eps-BearerIdentity:

4> indicate the release of the DRB and the eps-BearerIdentity of the released DRB to upper layers.

NOTE: The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the drb-ToReleaseList includes any drb-Identity value that is not part of the current UE configuration.

NOTE: Whether or not the RLC and MAC entities associated with this PDCP entity are reset or released is determined by the CellGroupConfig.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled::

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> else:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the UE is operating in EN-DC:

3>if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

4> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

3> else:

4> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> if target RAT is E-UTRA/5GC:, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.4.2.3, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> else:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled::

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB), as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], clause 5.1.2;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323[5];

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

NOTE 1: Void

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KeNB or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of cipheriong or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

8.2.2.4.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.4.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (E-UTRA/EPC) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (E-UTRA/EPC) established and Test Mode (On) associated with UE test loop mode B configured on E-UTRA Cell 1 according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.4.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to add NR PSCell with SCG DRB. RRCConnectionReconfiguration message contains the ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST message.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

3

The UE transmits an ULInformationTransfer message containing the ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS BEARER CONTEXT ACCEPT message.

–>

ULInformationTransfer

EXCEPTION: Steps 4a1 to 4a2 describe behaviour that depends on the UE implementation; the "lower case letter" identifies a step sequence that take place depending on the UE implementation.

4a1

IF pc_IP_Ping = FALSE, then, the SS transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP message.

<–

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP

4a2

The UE transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE message.

–>

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE

5

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

1

P

6

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify PDCP discardTimer value of SCG DRB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

7

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

2

P

8

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

2

P

9

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing nr-Config-r15 and NR RadioBearerConfig to release PSCell and SCG DRB. RRCConnectionReconfiguration message contains the DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST message.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

10

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplet

3

P

11

The UE transmits an ULInformationTransfer message containing the DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER CONTEXT ACCEPT message.

–>

ULInformationTransfer

8.2.2.4.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup.

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-2: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-3: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

servedRadioBearer CHOICE {

drb-Identity

2

SCG DRB Id

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-4: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

cnAssociation CHOICE {

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of SCG DRB

}

drb-Identity

2

SCG DRB Id

}

}

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

secondary

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-5: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 6, Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-6: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

cnAssociation CHOICE {

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of SCG DRB

}

drb-Identity

2

SCG DRB Id

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-7: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

discardTimer

ms500

Other than default value.

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-8: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 9, Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

release

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-9: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.4.1.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToReleaseList

2

SCG DRB Id

}

8.2.2.4.2 PSCell addition, modification and release / SCG DRB / NR-DC

8.2.2.4.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to add an NR PSCell with SCG DRB }

then { UE configures the PSCell with SCG DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the SCG DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to release PSCell with SCG DRB }

then { UE releases the PSCell and SCG DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.4.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.1, 5.3.5.5.7, 5.3.5.6.4 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to nr-SCG:

3> include in the nr-SCG-Response the RRCReconfigurationComplete message;

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received via SRB1 within the nr-SCG within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup (UE in NR-DC, mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup was received in RRCReconfiguration via SRB1):

2> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig in nr-SCG:

3> initiate the Random Access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

2> else

3> the procedure ends;

NOTE 2a: The order in which the UE sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.1]

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the spCellConfig:

2> configure the SpCell as specified in 5.3.5.5.7;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.7]

The UE shall:

1> if the SpCellConfig contains spCellConfigDedicated:

2> configure the SpCell in accordance with the spCellConfigDedicated;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active uplink bandwidth part;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active downlink bandwidth part;

2> if any of the reference signal(s) that are used for radio link monitoring are reconfigured by the received spCellConfigDedicated:

3> stop timer T310 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> stop timer T312 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> reset the counters N310 and N311.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.4]

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration; or

1> for each drb-Identity value that is to be released as the result of full configuration according to 5.3.5.11:

2> release the PDCP entity and the drb-Identity;

2> if SDAP entity associated with this DRB is configured:

3> indicate the release of the DRB to SDAP entity associated with this DRB (TS 37.324 [24], clause 5.3.3);

2> if the DRB is associated with an eps-BearerIdentity:

3> if a new bearer is not added either with NR or E-UTRA with same eps-BearerIdentity:

4> indicate the release of the DRB and the eps-BearerIdentity of the released DRB to upper layers.

NOTE 1: The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the drb-ToReleaseList includes any drb-Identity value that is not part of the current UE configuration.

NOTE 2: Whether or not the RLC and MAC entities associated with this PDCP entity are reset or released is determined by the CellGroupConfig.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC; or

3> if the UE is connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the UE is capable of E-UTRA/5GC but not capable of NGEN-DC:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

4> else (i.e., a UE capable of NGEN-DC):

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the key (KUPenc) associated with the master key (KeNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity protection algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if an sdap-Config is included:

3> if an SDAP entity with the received pdu-Session does not exist:

4> establish an SDAP entity as specified in TS 37.324 [24] clause 5.1.1;

4> if an SDAP entity with the received pdu-Session did not exist prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

5> indicate the establishment of the user plane resources for the pdu-Session to upper layers;

3> configure the SDAP entity in accordance with the received sdap-Config as specified in TS 37.324 [24] and associate the DRB with the SDAP entity;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration and not configured with dapsConfig:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> if target RAT is E-UTRA/5GC:, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the UE is capable of E-UTRA/5GC but not capable of NGEN-DC:

5> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

6> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.4.2.3, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

4> else (i.e., a UE capable of NGEN-DC):

5> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

6> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB), as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in TS 38.323 [5];

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

2> if the sdap-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the SDAP entity in accordance with the received sdap-Config as specified in TS37.324 [24];

3> for each QFI value added in mappedQoS-FlowsToAdd, if the QFI value is previously configured, the QFI value is released from the old DRB;

NOTE 1: Void.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KgNB, KgNB to S-KeNB, KgNB to S-KgNB, or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of ciphering or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

8.2.2.4.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.4.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 10 is the PSCell.

– System information combination NR-1 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.3 is used in NR cell 1.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), Test Mode (On) associated with UE test loop mode B configured on NR Cell 1 according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.4.2.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message and a PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND to add NR PSCell with SCG DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

5GMM: DL NAS TRANSPORT
5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

2A

The UE transmits a ULInformationTransfer message and an PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE message.

–>

NR RRC: ULInformationTransfer

5GMM: UL NAS TRANSPORT

5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE

EXCEPTION: Steps 2Ba1 to 2Ba2 describe behaviour that depends on the UE implementation; the "lower case letter" identifies a step sequence that take place depending on the UE implementation.

2Ba1

IF pc_IP_Ping = FALSE, then, the SS transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP message.

<–

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP

2Ba2

The UE transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE message.

–>

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

1

P

4

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify PDCP discardTimer value of SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

2

P

7

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message to release NR PSCell and SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

8.2.2.4.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-1A: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND (step 1, Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.7.2-9.

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDU session ID

The same as the PDU session ID in PDU SESSION ESTABLISHMENT REQUEST associated with the Internet PDU session if available or with the first PDU session

Authorized QoS rules

One entry

QoS rule [1]

Reference QoS rule #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.1-5.

QFI=5

Authorized QoS flow descriptions

One entry

QoS flow [1]

Reference QoS flow #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.3-5.

QFI=5

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-2: Void

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-3: RRCCReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Mod)

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-4: RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Mod (Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-3)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-5: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

discardTimer

ms500

Other than default value.

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-6: RRCReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd

true

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Rel)

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-7: RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Rel (Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToReleaseList

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-2

}

Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.3-8: RRCReconfigurationComplete (step 2, Table 8.2.2.4.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508 [4], Table 4.6.1-14 with condition NR-DC

8.2.2.4.3 PSCell addition, modification and release / SCG DRB / NE-DC

8.2.2.4.3.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to add an E-UTRA PSCell with SCG DRB }

then { UE configures the PSCell with SCG DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, MCG(s) (NR PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the SCG DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, MCG(s) (NR PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to release E-UTRA PSCell with SCG DRB }

then { UE releases the PSCell and SCG DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.4.3.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.1, 5.3.5.5.7, TS 36.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.10.3d, 5.3.10.3e, 5.3.10.10. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to eutra-SCG:

4> perform the RRC connection reconfiguration as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.3.5.3 for the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included in eutra-SCG;

2> else (mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to release):

3> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig2:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to eutra-SCG:

3> include in the eutra-SCG-Response the E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message in accordance with TS 36.331 [10] clause 5.3.5.3;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.1]

The network configures the UE with Master Cell Group (MCG), and zero or one Secondary Cell Group (SCG). In (NG)EN-DC, the MCG is configured as specified in TS 36.331 [10], and for NE-DC, the SCG is configured as specified in TS 36.331 [10]. The network provides the configuration parameters for a cell group in the CellGroupConfig IE.

The UE performs the following actions based on a received CellGroupConfig IE:

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the spCellConfig:

2> configure the SpCell as specified in 5.3.5.5.7;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.7]

The UE shall:

1> if the SpCellConfig contains spCellConfigDedicated:

2> configure the SpCell in accordance with the spCellConfigDedicated;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active uplink bandwidth part;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active downlink bandwidth part;

2> if any of the reference signal(s) that are used for radio link monitoring are reconfigured by the received spCellConfigDedicated:

3> stop timer T310 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> stop timer T312 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> reset the counters N310 and N311.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the sCellGroupToReleaseList:

2> perform SCell group release as specified in 5.3.10.3d;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the sCellGroupToAddModList:

2> perform SCell group addition or modification as specified in 5.3.10.3e;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the scg-Configuration; or

1> if the current UE configuration includes one or more split DRBs configured with pdcp-Config and the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes radioResourceConfigDedicated including drb-ToAddModList:

2> perform SCG reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.10.10;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes perCC-GapIndicationRequest:

3> include perCC-GapIndicationList and numFreqEffective;

2> if the frequencies are configured for reduced measurement performance:

3> include numFreqEffectiveReduced;

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the UE is configured with NE-DC:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message was included in an NR RRCResume message:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCResumeComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.13.4;

2> else:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> else:

2> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.3d]

The UE shall:

1> if the release is triggered by reception of the sCellGroupToReleaseList:

2> for each sCellGroupIndex value included in the sCellGroupToReleaseList:

3> if the current UE configuration includes an SCell with value sCellGroupIndex:

4> consider the SCell not to be part of the SCell group indicated by sCellGroupIndex;

4> consider the sCellConfigCommon of the SCell group to be not applicable for the SCell;

3> release the SCell group;

1> if the release is triggered by RRC connection re-establishment:

2> release all SCell groups that are part of the current UE configuration;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.3e]

The UE shall:

1> for each sCellGroupIndex value included in the sCellGroupToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (SCell group modification):

2> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToReleaseList that is part of the SCell group indicated by sCellGroupIndex (SCell deletion from SCell group):

3> consider the sCellConfigCommon of the SCell group to be not applicable for the SCell;

3> consider the SCell not to be part of the SCell group indicated by sCellGroupIndex

2> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList that is not part of the SCell group indicated by sCellGroupIndex (SCell addition to SCell group):

3> consider the SCell to be part of the SCell group indicated by sCellGroupIndex;

3> apply the SCell configuration for parameters not already configured as part of the current SCell configuration in accordance with the sCellConfigCommon for the SCell group;

2> if sCellConfigCommon is included (modify the SCell group configuration):

3> for each SCell that is part of the current SCell group indicated by sCellGroupIndex:

4> apply the SCell configuration for parameters not already configured as part of the current SCell configuration in accordance with the sCellConfigCommon for the SCell group;

1> for each sCellGroupIndex value included in the sCellGroupToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SCell group addition):

2> for each sCellIndex value included in the sCellToAddModList (SCell addition to the group):

3> consider the SCell to be part of the SCell group indicated by sCellGroupIndex

3> apply the SCell configuration for parameters not already configured as part of the current SCell configuration in accordance with the sCellConfigCommon for the SCell group;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.10]

The UE shall:

1> if scg-Configuration is received and is set to release or includes the mobilityControlInfoSCG (i.e. SCG release/ change):

2> if mobilityControlInfo is not received (i.e. SCG release/ change without HO):

3> reset SCG MAC, if configured;

3> if the UE is not configured with NE-DC:

4> for each drb-Identity value that is part of the current UE configuration:

5> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an SCG DRB:

6> re-establish the PDCP entity and the SCG RLC entity or entities;

5> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is a split DRB:

6> perform PDCP data recovery and re-establish the SCG RLC entity;

5> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an MCG DRB; and

5> drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-Type is included and set to scg (i.e. MCG to SCG):

6> re-establish the PDCP entity and the MCG RLC entity or entities;

3> configure lower layers to consider the SCG SCell(s), except for the PSCell, to be in deactivated state;

1> if scg-Configuration is received and is set to release:

2> release the entire SCG configuration, except for the DRB configuration (i.e. as configured by drb-ToAddModListSCG);

2> if the current UE configuration includes one or more split or SCG DRBs and the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes radioResourceConfigDedicated including drb-ToAddModList:

3> reconfigure the SCG or split DRB by drb-ToAddModList as specified in 5.3.10.12;

2> stop timer T313, if running;

2> stop timer T307, if running;

1> else:

2> if scg-ConfigPartMCG is received and includes the scg-Counter:

3> update the S-KeNB key based on the KeNB key and using the received scg-Counter value, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];

3> derive the KUPenc key associated with the cipheringAlgorithmSCG included in mobilityControlInfoSCG within the received scg-ConfigPartSCG, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];

3> configure lower layers to apply the ciphering algorithm and the KUPenc key;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCG:

3> reconfigure the dedicated radio resource configuration for the SCG as specified in 5.3.10.11;

2> if the current UE configuration includes one or more split or SCG DRBs and the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes radioResourceConfigDedicated including drb-ToAddModList:

3> reconfigure the SCG or split DRB by drb-ToAddModList as specified in 5.3.10.12;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes measConfigSN:

3> for measConfigSN perform the actions as specified in 5.5.2 for measConfig unless explicitly stated otherwise;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the sCellToReleaseListSCG:

3> perform SCell release for the SCG as specified in 5.3.10.3a;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the pSCellToAddMod:

3> perform PSCell addition or modification as specified in 5.3.10.3c;

NOTE 0: This procedure is also used to release the PSCell e.g. PSCell change, SI change for the PSCell.

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the sCellToAddModListSCG:

3> perform SCell addition or modification as specified in 5.3.10.3b;

2> configure lower layers in accordance with mobilityControlInfoSCG, if received;

2> if rach-SkipSCG is configured:

3> configure lower layers to apply the rach-SkipSCG for the target SCG, as specified in TS 36.213 [23] and TS 36.321 [6];

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the mobilityControlInfoSCG (i.e. SCG change):

3> resume all SCG DRBs and resume SCG transmission for split DRBs, if suspended;

3> stop timer T313, if running;

3> start timer T307 with the timer value set to t307, as included in the mobilityControlInfoSCG, if makeBeforeBreakSCG is not configured;

3> start synchronising to the DL of the target PSCell;

3> initiate the random access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 36.321 [6], if rach-SkipSCG is not configured:

NOTE 1: The UE is not required to determine the SFN of the target PSCell by acquiring system information from that cell before performing RACH access in the target PSCell.

3> the procedure ends, except that the following actions are performed when MAC successfully completes the random access procedure on the PSCell or when MAC indicates the successful reception of a PDCCH transmission addressed to C-RNTI and if rach-skipSCG is configured:

4> stop timer T307;

4> release rach-SkipSCG;

4> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the target PSCell, if any;

4> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the target PSCell (e.g. periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of the target PSCell;

NOTE 2: Whenever the UE shall setup or reconfigure a configuration in accordance with a field that is received it applies the new configuration, except for the cases addressed by the above statements.

8.2.2.4.3.3 Test description

8.2.2.4.3.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and EUTRA Cell 1 is the PS Cell.

UE:

– None

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), Test Mode (On) associated with UE test loop mode B configured on NR Cell 1 according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.4.3.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing RRCConnectionReconfiguration message and a PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND to add E-UTRA PSCell with SCG DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

(RRCConnectionReconfiguration)
5GMM: DL NAS TRANSPORT
5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND

EXCEPTION: Depending upon UE implementation, steps 2 and 2A can occur in any order

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including eutra-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

(RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

2A

The UE transmits a ULInformationTransfer message and an PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE message.

–>

NR RRC: ULInformationTransfer

5GMM: UL NAS TRANSPORT

5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

1

P

EXCEPTION: Steps 3Aa1 to 3Aa2 describe behaviour that depends on the UE implementation; the "lower case letter" identifies a step sequence that take place depending on the UE implementation.

3Aa1

IF pc_IP_Ping = FALSE, then, the SS transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP message.

<–

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP

3Aa2

The UE transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE message.

–>

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE

3B

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

1

P

4

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RadioBearerConfig to modify PDCP discardTimer value of SCG DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

2

P

7

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message and a PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND to release E-UTRA PSCell and SCG DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

EXCEPTION: Depending upon UE implementation, steps 8 and 9 can occur in any order

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

9

The UE transmits a ULInformationTransfer message and an PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE message.

–>

NR RRC: ULInformationTransfer

5GMM: UL NAS TRANSPORT

5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE

8.2.2.4.3.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1 , Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

rrc-TransactionIdentifier

RRC-TransactionIdentifier

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

secondaryCellGroup

Not present

measConfig

Not present

lateNonCriticalExtension

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

Not present

fullConfig

Not present

dedicatedNAS-MessageList

Not present

masterKeyUpdate

Not present

dedicatedSIB1-Delivery

Not present

dedicatedSystemInformationDelivery

Not present

otherConfig

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

otherConfig-v1540

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd

Not present

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

eutra-SCG

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

OCTET STRING

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig with condition DRBn and SecondaryKeys

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig)

sk-Counter

SK-Counter

nonCriticalExtension

Not present

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-2: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

scg-Configuration-r12

SCG-Configuration-r12-NE-DC

Step 1

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-3: SCG-Configuration-r12-NE-DC (Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: 36.508, Clause 4.6.3, Table 4.6.3-19G, condition NE-DC

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-1A: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND (step 1, Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.7.2-9.

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDU session ID

The same as the PDU session ID in PDU SESSION ESTABLISHMENT REQUEST associated with the Internet PDU session if available or with the first PDU session

Authorized QoS rules

One entry

QoS rule

Reference QoS rule #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.1-5.

QFI=5

Authorized QoS flow descriptions

One entry

QoS flow

Reference QoS flow #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.3-5.

QFI=5

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step4 , step7, Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

rrc-TransactionIdentifier

RRC-TransactionIdentifier

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not Present

secondaryCellGroup

Not present

measConfig

Not present

lateNonCriticalExtension

Not present

nonCriticalExtension

Not present

Step 4

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

Step 7

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

release

Step 7

}

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Mod)

As specified in Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-5

Step 4

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Rel)

As specified in Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-6

Step 7

sk-Counter

Not present

nonCriticalExtension

Not present

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-5: RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Mod (Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-1

pdcp-Config SEQUENCE {

discardTimer

ms500

Other than default value.

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-6: RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Rel (Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-Identity {

DRB-Identity

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-1

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-7: RRCReconfigurationComplete (step 3, Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-14 Condition with NE-DC

Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-8: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND (step 7, Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.7.2-9.

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDU session ID

The same as the PDU session ID in PDU SESSION ESTABLISHMENT REQUEST associated with the Internet PDU session if available or with the first PDU session

Authorized QoS rules

One entry

QoS rule identifier

‘00000101’B

QFI=5

Rule operation code

‘010’B

Delete existing QoS rule

Authorized QoS flow descriptions

QoS flow descriptions

QFI

‘00000101’B

QFI=5

Operation code

‘010’B

Delete existing QoS flow

8.2.2.5 PSCell addition, modification and release / Split DRB

8.2.2.5.1 PSCell addition, modification and release / Split DRB / EN-DC

8.2.2.5.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED state }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to add PSCell with Split DRB }

then { UE configures the PSCell and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the Split DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to release PSCell with Split DRB }

then { UE releases the PSCell and Split DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.5.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3, TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.7, 5.3.5.6.4 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-Config and it is set to release: or

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes endc-ReleaseAndAdd and it is set to TRUE:

2> perform EN-DC release as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.10;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the sk-Counter:

2> perform key update procedure as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.7;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes perCC-GapIndicationRequest:

3> include perCC-GapIndicationList and numFreqEffective;

2> if the frequencies are configured for reduced measurement performance:

3> include numFreqEffectiveReduced;

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82, 5.3.5.3];

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the fullConfig:

2> perform the radio configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.5.11;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the received masterCellGroup according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterKeyUpdate:

2> perform security key update procedure as specified in 5.3.5.7;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the dedicatedSIB1-Delivery:

2> perform the action upon reception of SIB1 as specified in 5.2.2.4.2;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the dedicatedSystemInformationDelivery:

2> perform the action upon reception of System Information as specified in 5.2.2.4;

1> set the content of RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent, or;

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent:

3> include the uplinkTxDirectCurrentList;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an SCG:

4> initiate the random access procedure on the SpCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

3> else:

4> the procedure ends;

NOTE: The order the UE sends the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

2> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB3):

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

NOTE: For EN-DC, in the case of SRB1, the random access is triggered by RRC layer itself as there is not necessarily other UL transmission. In the case of SRB3, the random access is triggered by the MAC layer due to arrival of RRCReconfigurationComplete.

1 > else:

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

1> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG or SCG, and when MAC of an NR cell group successfully completes a random access procedure triggered above;

2> stop timer T304 for that cell group;

2> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell, if any;

2> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of that target SpCell;

2> if the reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG:

3> if the active downlink BWP, which is indicated by the firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id for the target SpCell of the MCG, has a common search space configured:

4> acquire the SIB1 of the target SpCell of the MCG, as specified in 5.2.2.3.1;

2> the procedure ends.

NOTE: The UE is only required to acquire broadcasted SIB1 if the UE can acquire it without disrupting unicast data reception, i.e. the broadcast and unicast beams are quasi co-located.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.7]

The UE shall:

1> if the SpCellConfig contains the rlf-TimersAndConstants:

2> configure the RLF timers and constants for this cell group as specified in 5.3.5.5.6.

1> else if rlf-TimersAndConstants is not configured for this cell group:

2> use values for timers T301, T310, T311 and constants N310, N311, as included in ue-TimersAndConstants received in SIB1;

1> if the SpCellConfig contains spCellConfigDedicated:

2> configure the SpCell in accordance with the spCellConfigDedicated;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active uplink bandwidth part;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active downlink bandwidth part;

2> if the any of the reference signal(s) that are used for radio link monitoring are reconfigured by the received spCellConfigDedicated:

3> stop timer T310 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> reset the counters N310 and N311.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.4]

Editor’s Note: FFS / TODO: Add handling for the new QoS concept (mapping of flows; configuration of QFI-to-DRB mapping; reflective QoS…) but keep also EPS-Bearer handling for the EN-DC case

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (DRB release):

2> release the PDCP entity;

2> if SDAP entity associated with this DRB is configured:

3> indicate the release of the DRB to SDAP entity associated with this DRB (TS 37.324 [xx] section 5.3.3);

2> if the UE is operating in EN-DC:

3> if a new bearer is not added either with NR or E-UTRA with same eps-BearerIdentity:

4> indicate the release of the DRB and the eps-BearerIdentity of the released DRB to upper layers.

NOTE: The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the drb-ToReleaseList includes any drb-Identity value that is not part of the current UE configuration.

NOTE: Whether or not the RLC and MAC entities associated with this PDCP entity are reset or released is determined by the CellGroupConfig.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> if an sdap-Config is included:

3> if an SDAP entity with the received pdu-Session does not exist:

4> establish an SDAP entity as specified in TS 37.324 [xx] section 5.1.1;

3> configure the SDAP entity in accordance with the received sdap-Config as specified in TS 37.324 [xx] and associate the DRB with the SDAP entity;

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the UE is operating in EN-DC:

3>if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

4> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

3> else:

4> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if an sdap-Config is included, reconfigure the SDAP entity in accordance with the received sdap-Config as specified in TS 37.324 [xx];

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> if target RAT is E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10, 5.4.2.3], i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> else:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master or secondary key (KeNB/S-KgNB/KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], section 5.1.2;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

NOTE 1: Removal and addition of the same drb-Identity in a single radioResourceConfig is not supported. In case drb-Identity is removed and added due to reconfiguration with sync or re-establishment with the full configuration option, the network can use the same value of drb-Identity.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KeNB or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of ciphering or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

8.2.2.5.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.5.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (E-UTRA/EPC) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (E-UTRA/EPC) established and Test Mode (On) associated with UE test loop mode B configured on E-UTRA Cell 1 according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.5.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to add NR PSCell with Split DRB. RRCConnectionReconfiguration message contains the ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST message.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

3

The UE transmits an ULInformationTransfer message containing the ACTIVATE DEDICATED EPS BEARER CONTEXT ACCEPT message.

–>

ULInformationTransfer

EXCEPTION: Steps 4a1 to 4a2 describe behaviour that depends on the UE implementation; the "lower case letter" identifies a step sequence that take place depending on the UE implementation.

4a1

IF pc_IP_Ping = FALSE, then the SS transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP message.

<–

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP

4a2

The UE transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE message.

–>

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE

5

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

1

P

6

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify PDCP discardTimer value of Split DRB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

7

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

2

P

8

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on the Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

2

P

9

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing nr-Config-r15 and NR RadioBearerConfig to release PSCell and Split DRB. RRCConnectionReconfiguration message contains the DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER CONTEXT REQUEST message.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

10

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

3

P

11

The UE transmits an ULInformationTransfer message containing the DEACTIVATE EPS BEARER CONTEXT ACCEPT message.

–>

ULInformationTransfer

8.2.2.5.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup.

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-2: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13, condition EN-DC

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-3: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132, condition EN-DC_DRB

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-4: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99, condition Split

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-5: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 6, Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-6: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132, condition EN-DC

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-7: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

discardTimer

ms500

Other than default value.

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-8: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 9, Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

release

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-9: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.5.1.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToReleaseList

2

Split DRB Id

}

8.2.2.5.2 PSCell addition, modification and release / Split DRB / NR-DC

8.2.2.5.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to add an NR PSCell with Split DRB }

then { UE configures the PSCell and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the Split DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to release PSCell with Split DRB }

then { UE releases the PSCell and Split DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.5.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.1, 5.3.5.5.7, 5.3.5.6.4 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to nr-SCG:

3> include in the nr-SCG-Response the RRCReconfigurationComplete message;

1> else if the RRCReconfiguration message was received via SRB1 within the nr-SCG within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup (UE in NR-DC, mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup was received in RRCReconfiguration via SRB1):

2> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig in nr-SCG:

3> initiate the Random Access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

2> else

3> the procedure ends;

NOTE 2a: The order in which the UE sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.1]

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the spCellConfig:

2> configure the SpCell as specified in 5.3.5.5.7;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.7]

The UE shall:

1> if the SpCellConfig contains spCellConfigDedicated:

2> configure the SpCell in accordance with the spCellConfigDedicated;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active uplink bandwidth part;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active downlink bandwidth part;

2> if any of the reference signal(s) that are used for radio link monitoring are reconfigured by the received spCellConfigDedicated:

3> stop timer T310 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> stop timer T312 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> reset the counters N310 and N311.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.4]

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration; or

1> for each drb-Identity value that is to be released as the result of full configuration according to 5.3.5.11:

2> release the PDCP entity and the drb-Identity;

2> if SDAP entity associated with this DRB is configured:

3> indicate the release of the DRB to SDAP entity associated with this DRB (TS 37.324 [24], clause 5.3.3);

2> if the DRB is associated with an eps-BearerIdentity:

3> if a new bearer is not added either with NR or E-UTRA with same eps-BearerIdentity:

4> indicate the release of the DRB and the eps-BearerIdentity of the released DRB to upper layers.

NOTE 1: The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the drb-ToReleaseList includes any drb-Identity value that is not part of the current UE configuration.

NOTE 2: Whether or not the RLC and MAC entities associated with this PDCP entity are reset or released is determined by the CellGroupConfig.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC; or

3> if the UE is connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the UE is capable of E-UTRA/5GC but not capable of NGEN-DC:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

4> else (i.e., a UE capable of NGEN-DC):

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the key (KUPenc) associated with the master key (KeNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity protection algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if an sdap-Config is included:

3> if an SDAP entity with the received pdu-Session does not exist:

4> establish an SDAP entity as specified in TS 37.324 [24] clause 5.1.1;

4> if an SDAP entity with the received pdu-Session did not exist prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

5> indicate the establishment of the user plane resources for the pdu-Session to upper layers;

3> configure the SDAP entity in accordance with the received sdap-Config as specified in TS 37.324 [24] and associate the DRB with the SDAP entity;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration and not configured with dapsConfig:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> if target RAT is E-UTRA/5GC:, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the UE is capable of E-UTRA/5GC but not capable of NGEN-DC:

5> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

6> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.4.2.3, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

4> else (i.e., a UE capable of NGEN-DC):

5> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

6> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB), as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in TS 38.323 [5];

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

2> if the sdap-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the SDAP entity in accordance with the received sdap-Config as specified in TS37.324 [24];

3> for each QFI value added in mappedQoS-FlowsToAdd, if the QFI value is previously configured, the QFI value is released from the old DRB;

NOTE 1: Void.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KgNB, KgNB to S-KeNB, KgNB to S-KgNB, or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of ciphering or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

8.2.2.5.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.5.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 10 is the PSCell.

– System information combination NR-1 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.3 is used in NR cell 1.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), Test Mode (On) associated with UE test loop mode B configured on NR Cell 1 according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.5.2.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration containing RRCReconfiguration-SCG message and a PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND to add NR PSCell with Split DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

5GMM: DL NAS TRANSPORT
5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

2A

The UE transmits a ULInformationTransfer message and an PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE message.

–>

NR RRC: ULInformationTransfer

5GMM: UL NAS TRANSPORT

5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE

EXCEPTION: Steps 2Ba1 to 2Ba2 describe behaviour that depends on the UE implementation; the "lower case letter" identifies a step sequence that take place depending on the UE implementation.

2Ba1

IF pc_IP_Ping = FALSE, then, the SS transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP message.

<–

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP

2Ba2

The UE transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE message.

–>

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB over the SCG path?

1

P

4

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify PDCP discardTimer value of Split DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB over the SCG path?

2

P

7

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to release PSCell and Split DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

8.2.2.5.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-19 with condition DRBn

SCG DRBn added in master cell group

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration) as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition NR-DC_SCG

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig) as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], with condition DRBn, Split and SecondaryKeys

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.4.5.3.3-1A: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND (step 1, Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.7.2-9.

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDU session ID

The same as the PDU session ID in PDU SESSION ESTABLISHMENT REQUEST associated with the Internet PDU session if available or with the first PDU session

Authorized QoS rules

One entry

QoS rule [1]

Reference QoS rule #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.1-5.

QFI=5

Authorized QoS flow descriptions

One entry

QoS flow [1]

Reference QoS flow #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.3-5.

QFI=5

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-2: Void

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-3: Void

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Mod)

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-5: RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Mod (Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-2

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-6: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

discardTimer

ms500

Other than default value.

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-7: RRCReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig_Split_RLC-Rel

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd

true

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Rel)

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-8: RadioBearerConfig_SCG-Rel (Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-7)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToReleaseList

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-2

}

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-9: CellGroupConfig_Split_RLC-Rel (Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-7)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE {

1 entry

logicalChannelIdentity

LogicalChannelIdentity with condition DRBn

n is set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-2

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-10: RRCReconfigurationComplete (step 2, Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508 [4], Table 4.6.1-14 with condition NR-DC

8.2.2.5.3 PSCell addition, modification and release / Split DRB / NE-DC

8.2.2.5.3.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to add an E-UTRA PSCell with Split DRB }

then { UE configures the PSCell with Split DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, MCG(s) (NR PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the Split DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, MCG(s) (NR PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to release E-UTRA PSCell with Split DRB }

then { UE releases the PSCell and Split DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.5.3.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.1, 5.3.5.5.7, TS 36.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.10.10. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to eutra-SCG:

4> perform the RRC connection reconfiguration as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.3.5.3 for the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included in eutra-SCG;

2> else (mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to release):

3> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig2:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to eutra-SCG:

3> include in the eutra-SCG-Response the E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message in accordance with TS 36.331 [10] clause 5.3.5.3;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.1]

The network configures the UE with Master Cell Group (MCG), and zero or one Secondary Cell Group (SCG). In (NG)EN-DC, the MCG is configured as specified in TS 36.331 [10], and for NE-DC, the SCG is configured as specified in TS 36.331 [10]. The network provides the configuration parameters for a cell group in the CellGroupConfig IE.

The UE performs the following actions based on a received CellGroupConfig IE:

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the spCellConfig:

2> configure the SpCell as specified in 5.3.5.5.7;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.7]

The UE shall:

1> if the SpCellConfig contains spCellConfigDedicated:

2> configure the SpCell in accordance with the spCellConfigDedicated;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active uplink bandwidth part;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active downlink bandwidth part;

2> if any of the reference signal(s) that are used for radio link monitoring are reconfigured by the received spCellConfigDedicated:

3> stop timer T310 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> stop timer T312 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> reset the counters N310 and N311.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the scg-Configuration; or

1> if the current UE configuration includes one or more split DRBs configured with pdcp-Config and the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes radioResourceConfigDedicated including drb-ToAddModList:

2> perform SCG reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.10.10;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes perCC-GapIndicationRequest:

3> include perCC-GapIndicationList and numFreqEffective;

2> if the frequencies are configured for reduced measurement performance:

3> include numFreqEffectiveReduced;

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the UE is configured with NE-DC:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message was included in an NR RRCResume message:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCResumeComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.13.4;

2> else:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> else:

2> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.10]

The UE shall:

1> if scg-Configuration is received and is set to release or includes the mobilityControlInfoSCG (i.e. SCG release/ change):

2> if mobilityControlInfo is not received (i.e. SCG release/ change without HO):

3> reset SCG MAC, if configured;

3> if the UE is not configured with NE-DC:

4> for each drb-Identity value that is part of the current UE configuration:

5> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an SCG DRB:

6> re-establish the PDCP entity and the SCG RLC entity or entities;

5> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is a split DRB:

6> perform PDCP data recovery and re-establish the SCG RLC entity;

5> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an MCG DRB; and

5> drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-Type is included and set to scg (i.e. MCG to SCG):

6> re-establish the PDCP entity and the MCG RLC entity or entities;

3> configure lower layers to consider the SCG SCell(s), except for the PSCell, to be in deactivated state;

1> if scg-Configuration is received and is set to release:

2> release the entire SCG configuration, except for the DRB configuration (i.e. as configured by drb-ToAddModListSCG);

2> if the current UE configuration includes one or more split or SCG DRBs and the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes radioResourceConfigDedicated including drb-ToAddModList:

3> reconfigure the SCG or split DRB by drb-ToAddModList as specified in 5.3.10.12;

2> stop timer T313, if running;

2> stop timer T307, if running;

1> else:

2> if scg-ConfigPartMCG is received and includes the scg-Counter:

3> update the S-KeNB key based on the KeNB key and using the received scg-Counter value, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];

3> derive the KUPenc key associated with the cipheringAlgorithmSCG included in mobilityControlInfoSCG within the received scg-ConfigPartSCG, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];

3> configure lower layers to apply the ciphering algorithm and the KUPenc key;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCG:

3> reconfigure the dedicated radio resource configuration for the SCG as specified in 5.3.10.11;

2> if the current UE configuration includes one or more split or SCG DRBs and the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes radioResourceConfigDedicated including drb-ToAddModList:

3> reconfigure the SCG or split DRB by drb-ToAddModList as specified in 5.3.10.12;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes measConfigSN:

3> for measConfigSN perform the actions as specified in 5.5.2 for measConfig unless explicitly stated otherwise;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the sCellToReleaseListSCG:

3> perform SCell release for the SCG as specified in 5.3.10.3a;

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the pSCellToAddMod:

3> perform PSCell addition or modification as specified in 5.3.10.3c;

NOTE 0: This procedure is also used to release the PSCell e.g. PSCell change, SI change for the PSCell.

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the sCellToAddModListSCG:

3> perform SCell addition or modification as specified in 5.3.10.3b;

2> configure lower layers in accordance with mobilityControlInfoSCG, if received;

2> if rach-SkipSCG is configured:

3> configure lower layers to apply the rach-SkipSCG for the target SCG, as specified in TS 36.213 [23] and TS 36.321 [6];

2> if scg-ConfigPartSCG is received and includes the mobilityControlInfoSCG (i.e. SCG change):

3> resume all SCG DRBs and resume SCG transmission for split DRBs, if suspended;

3> stop timer T313, if running;

3> start timer T307 with the timer value set to t307, as included in the mobilityControlInfoSCG, if makeBeforeBreakSCG is not configured;

3> start synchronising to the DL of the target PSCell;

3> initiate the random access procedure on the PSCell, as specified in TS 36.321 [6], if rach-SkipSCG is not configured:

NOTE 1: The UE is not required to determine the SFN of the target PSCell by acquiring system information from that cell before performing RACH access in the target PSCell.

3> the procedure ends, except that the following actions are performed when MAC successfully completes the random access procedure on the PSCell or when MAC indicates the successful reception of a PDCCH transmission addressed to C-RNTI and if rach-skipSCG is configured:

4> stop timer T307;

4> release rach-SkipSCG;

4> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the target PSCell, if any;

4> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the target PSCell (e.g. periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of the target PSCell;

NOTE 2: Whenever the UE shall setup or reconfigure a configuration in accordance with a field that is received it applies the new configuration, except for the cases addressed by the above statements.

8.2.2.5.3.3 Test description

8.2.2.5.3.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and EUTRA Cell 1 is the PS Cell.

UE:

– None

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR), Test Mode (On) associated with UE test loop mode B configured on NR Cell 1 according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.5.3.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing RRCConnectionReconfiguration message and a PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND to add E-UTRA PSCell with Split DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

(RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

5GMM: DL NAS TRANSPORT
5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND

EXCEPTION: Depending upon UE implementation, steps 2 and 2A can occur in any order

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including eutra-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

(RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

2A

The UE transmits a ULInformationTransfer message and an PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE message.

–>

NR RRC: ULInformationTransfer

5GMM: UL NAS TRANSPORT

5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB?

1

P

EXCEPTION: Steps 3Aa1 to 3Aa2 describe behaviour that depends on the UE implementation; the "lower case letter" identifies a step sequence that take place depending on the UE implementation.

3Aa1

IF pc_IP_Ping = FALSE, then, the SS transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP message.

<–

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP

3Aa2

The UE transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE message.

–>

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE

3B

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB?

1

P

4

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RadioBearerConfig to modify PDCP discardTimer value of Split DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

(RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

(RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB?

2

P

7

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message and a PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND to release E-UTRA PSCell and Split DRB.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

(RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

5GMM: DL NAS TRANSPORT
5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

(RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

3

P

9

The UE transmits a ULInformationTransfer message and an PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE message.

–>

NR RRC: ULInformationTransfer

5GMM: UL NAS TRANSPORT

5GSM: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMPLETE

8.2.2.5.3.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

rrc-TransactionIdentifier

RRC-TransactionIdentifier

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

secondaryCellGroup

Not present

measConfig

Not present

lateNonCriticalExtension

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig with condition DRBn

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

fullConfig

Not present

dedicatedNAS-MessageList

Not present

masterKeyUpdate

Not present

dedicatedSIB1-Delivery

Not present

dedicatedSystemInformationDelivery

Not present

otherConfig

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

otherConfig-v1540

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd

Not present

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

eutra-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig) as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], with condition DRBn, Split and SecondaryKeys

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig)

sk-Counter

SK-Counter

nonCriticalExtension

Not present

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-2: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

scg-Configuration-r12

SCG-Configuration-r12-NE-DC

Step 1

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-3: SCG-Configuration-r12-NE-DC (Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: 36.508, Clause 4.6.3, Table 4.6.3-19G, condition NE-DC

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-3A: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND (step 1, Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.7.2-9.

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDU session ID

The same as the PDU session ID in PDU SESSION ESTABLISHMENT REQUEST associated with the Internet PDU session if available or with the first PDU session

Authorized QoS rules

One entry

QoS rule

Reference QoS rule #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.1-5.

QFI=5

Authorized QoS flow descriptions

One entry

QoS flow

Reference QoS flow #5 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.8.2.3-5.

QFI=5

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step4 , step7, Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

rrc-TransactionIdentifier

RRC-TransactionIdentifier

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

Not present

secondaryCellGroup

Not present

measConfig

Not present

lateNonCriticalExtension

Not present

nonCriticalExtension

Not present

Step 4

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

Step 7

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig_Split_RLC-Rel

As specified in Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-7A

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

Step 7

otherConfig-v1540

Not present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

release

Step 7

}

radioBearerConfig2

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_Split-Mod)

As specified in Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-7B

Step 4

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RadioBearerConfig_Split-Rel)

As specified in Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-7C

Step 7

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-5: Void

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-6: Void

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-7: Void

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-7A: RadioBearerConfig_Split-Mod (Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-1

pdcp-Config SEQUENCE {

discardTimer

ms500

Other than default value.

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-7B: CellGroupConfig_Split_RLC-Rel (Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE {

1 entry

logicalChannelIdentity

LogicalChannelIdentity with condition DRBn

n is set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.5.2.3.3-2

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-7C: RadioBearerConfig_Split-Rel (Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-Identity {

DRB-Identity

DRBn

n set to the same DRB ID as in Table 8.2.2.4.3.3.3-1

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-8: RRCReconfigurationComplete (step 3, step 6, step 8, Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-14

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfigurationComplete ::= SEQUENCE {

rrc-TransactionIdentifier

Not checked

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfigurationComplete SEQUENCE {

lateNonCriticalExtension

Not checked

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

uplinkTxDirectCurrentList

Not checked

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

scg-Response CHOICE {

eutra-SCG-Response

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

OCTET STRING

}

nonCriticalExtension

Not checked

}

}

nonCriticalExtension

Not checked

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.3-9: PDU SESSION MODIFICATION COMMAND (step 7, Table 8.2.2.5.3.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.7.2-9.

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDU session ID

The same as the PDU session ID in PDU SESSION ESTABLISHMENT REQUEST associated with the Internet PDU session if available or with the first PDU session

Authorized QoS rules

One entry

QoS rule identifier

‘00000101’B

QFI=5

Rule operation code

‘010’B

Delete existing QoS rule

Authorized QoS flow descriptions

QoS flow descriptions

QFI

‘00000101’B

QFI=5

Operation code

‘010’B

Delete existing QoS flow

8.2.2.6 Bearer Modification / MCG DRB

8.2.2.6.1 Bearer Modification / MCG DRB / SRB / PDCP version change / EN-DC

8.2.2.6.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED state}

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration with mobility message to change PDCP version of the SRB1 and SRB2 from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP }

then { UE performs PDCP version change and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED state with SRB1 and SRB2 using NR PDCP }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration with mobility message to change PDCP version of the MCG DRB from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP }

then { UE performs PDCP version change and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED state with SRB1 and SRB2 using NR PDCP }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration with mobility message to change PDCP version of the MCG DRB from NR PDCP to E-UTRA PDCP }

then { UE performs PDCP version change and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(4)

with { UE in E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED state with SRB1 and SRB2 using NR PDCP }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration with mobility message to change PDCP version of the SRB1 and SRB2 from NR PDCP to E-UTRA PDCP }

then { UE performs PDCP version change and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.6.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 36.331, clause 5.3.1.1, 5.3.5.4 and 5.3.10.3, TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5, 5.3.5.5.7, 5.3.5.6, 5.3.5.6.3 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.1.1]

Change to NR PDCP or vice versa, for both SRBs and DRBs, can be performed using an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the mobilityControlInfo (handover) by release and addition of the concerned RB (for DRBs) or of the concerned PDCP entity (for SRBs). The same RRCConnectionReconfiguration message may be used to make changes regarding the CG(s) used for transmission. For SRBs, change from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP type may, before initial security activation, also be performed using an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message not including the mobilityControlInfo.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.4]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> stop timer T310, if running;

1> stop timer T312, if running;

1> start timer T304 with the timer value set to t304, as included in the mobilityControlInfo;

1> stop timer T370, if running;

1> if the carrierFreq is included:

2> consider the target PCell to be one on the frequency indicated by the carrierFreq with a physical cell identity indicated by the targetPhysCellId;

1> else:

2> consider the target PCell to be one on the frequency of the source PCell with a physical cell identity indicated by the targetPhysCellId;

1> start synchronising to the DL of the target PCell;

NOTE 1: The UE should perform the handover as soon as possible following the reception of the RRC message triggering the handover, which could be before confirming successful reception (HARQ and ARQ) of this message.

1> reset MCG MAC and SCG MAC, if configured;

1> re-establish PDCP for all RBs configured with pdcp-config that are established;

NOTE 2: The handling of the radio bearers after the successful completion of the PDCP re-establishment, e.g. the re-transmission of unacknowledged PDCP SDUs (as well as the associated status reporting), the handling of the SN and the HFN, is specified in TS 36.323 [8].

1> re-establish MCG RLC and SCG RLC, if configured, for all RBs that are established;

1> apply the value of the newUE-Identity as the C-RNTI;

1> configure lower layers in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigCommon;

1> configure lower layers in accordance with any additional fields, not covered in the previous, if included in the received mobilityControlInfo;

1> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the radioResourceConfigDedicated:

2> perform the radio resource configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.10;

2> store the nextHopChainingCount value;

2> else:

3> derive the KRRCint key associated with the current integrity algorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];

3> if connected as an RN:

4> derive the KUPint key associated with the current integrity algorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];

3> derive the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key associated with the current ciphering algorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];

1> configure lower layers to apply the integrity protection algorithm and the KRRCint key, i.e. the integrity protection configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;

1> configure lower layers to apply the ciphering algorithm, the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82, 5.3.5.6];

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> else if the UE has logged measurements available for E-UTRA and if the RPLMN is included in plmn-IdentityList stored in VarLogMeasReport:

3> include the logMeasAvailable;

2> if the UE has connection establishment failure information available in VarConnEstFailReport and if the RPLMN is equal to plmn-Identity stored in VarConnEstFailReport:

3> include connEstFailInfoAvailable;

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes perCC-GapIndicationRequest:

3> include perCC-GapIndicationList and numFreqEffective;

2> if the frequencies are configured for reduced measurement performance:

3> include numFreqEffectiveReduced;

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82, 5.3.5.3];

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission;

1> if MAC successfully completes the random access procedure; or

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (DRB reconfiguration):

2> if drb-ToAddModListSCG is not received or does not include the drb-Identity value:

3> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an MCG DRB or configured with MCG RLC bearer in EN-DC (reconfigure MCG RLC bearer for EN-DC or reconfigure MCG DRB):

4> if the pdcp-Config is included:

5> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

4> if the rlc-Config is included:

5> if reestablishRLC is received, re-establish the RLC entity of this DRB;

5> reconfigure the RLC entity or entities in accordance with the received rlc-Config;

4> if the logicalChannelConfig is included:

5> reconfigure the DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received logicalChannelConfig;

NOTE: Removal and addition of the same drb-Identity in a single radioResourceConfigDedicated is not supported. In case drb-Identity is removed and added due to handover or re-establishment with the full configuration option, the eNB can use the same value of drb-Identity.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> construct RRCReconfigurationComplete message and submit it via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an SCG:

4> initiate the random access procedure on the SpCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

2> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB3):

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

NOTE: In the case of SRB1, the random access is triggered by RRC layer itself as there is not necessarily other UL transmission. In the case of SRB3, the random access is triggered by the MAC layer due to arrival of RRCReconfigurationComplete.

1> if MAC of an NR cell group successfully completes a random access procedure triggered above;

2> stop timer T304 for that cell group;

2> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell, if any;

2> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of that target SpCell;

2> the procedure ends.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.3]

The UE shall:

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment or reconfiguration from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KRRCenc and KRRCint) associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, if applicable;

2> if the current UE configuration as configured by E-UTRA in TS 36.331 includes an SRB identified with the same srb-Identity value:

3> associate the E-UTRA RLC entity and DCCH of this SRB with the NR PDCP entity;

3> release the E-UTRA PDCP entity of this SRB;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> else:

3> configure the PDCP entity in accordance with the default configuration defined in 9.2.1 for the corresponding SRB;

1> for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> configure the PDCP entity to apply the integrity protection algorithm and KRRCint key associated with the KeNB/S-KgNB as indicated in keyToUse , i.e. the integrity protection configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;

3> configure the PDCP entity to apply the ciphering algorithm and KRRCenc key associated with the KeNB/S-KgNB as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this SRB as specified in 38.323 [5];

2> else, if the discardOnPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity to perform SDU discard as specified in TS 38.323 [5];

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

3> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

2> else:

3> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master or secondary key (KeNB/S-KgNB/KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], section 5.1.2;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

NOTE 1: Removal and addition of the same drb-Identity in a single radioResourceConfig is not supported. In case drb-Identity is removed and added due to reconfiguration with sync or re-establishment with the full configuration option, the network can use the same value of drb-Identity.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KeNB or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

8.2.2.6.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.6.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– EUTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PS Cell.

UE:

– None

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (E-UTRA/EPC) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (E-UTRA/EPC) and Test Mode (On) associated with UE test loop mode B configured on E-UTRA Cell 1 according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.6.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including MobilityControlInfo IE on E-UTRA Cell 1 to reconfigure SRB1 and SRB2 from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

1

P

EXCEPTION: Steps 3a1 to 3a2 describe behaviour that depends on the UE implementation; the "lower case letter" identifies a step sequence that take place depending on the UE implementation.

3a1

IF pc_IP_Ping = FALSE, then, the SS transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP message.

<–

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP

3a2

The UE transmits a CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE message.

–>

CLOSE UE TEST LOOP COMPLETE

4

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including MobilityControlInfo IE on E-UTRA Cell 1 to reconfigure MCG DRB from E-UTRA PDCP to NR PDCP?

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

NOTE: RRCConnectionReconfiguration is transmitted using SRB1. This implicitly verifies SRB1 PDCP version change.

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

1, 2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB using NR radio path?

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including MobilityControlInfo IE on E-UTRA Cell 1 to reconfigure MCG DRB from NR PDCP to E-UTRA PDCP?

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

3

P

9

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB using EUTRA radio path?

3

P

10

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including MobilityControlInfo IE on E-UTRA Cell 1 to reconfigure SRB1 and SRB2 from NR PDCP to E-UTRA PDCP.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

11

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

4

P

8.2.2.6.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 with condition HO

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-2

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15

Not present

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING containing RadioBearerConfig-MCG-SRB

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-3

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-2: MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell (Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.5-1

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

MobilityControlInfo-HO ::= SEQUENCE {

targetPhysCellId

PhysicalCellIdentity of E-UTRA Cell 1

carrierFreq

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-3: RadioBearerConfig-MCG-SRB (Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB_NR_PDCP

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-4: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 with condition HO

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-2

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MCG-DRB-NR-PDCP

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-5

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15

Not present

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING containing RadioBearerConfig according to TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with conditions MCG_NR_PDCP AND (SRB_NR_PDCP AND Re-establish_PDCP)

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-5: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MCG-DRB-NR-PDCP (Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MCG-DRB-NR-PDCP ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1]

DRB-ToAddMod-MCG-DRB-NR-PDCP

entry 1

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-6

}

drb-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-Identity {

1 entry

DRB-Identity[1]

Same as the DRB identity associated with the default EPS bearer

entry 1

}

physicalConfigDedicated

PhysicalConfigDedicated-DEFAULT with condition RBC-HO

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-6: DRB-ToAddMod-MCG-DRB-NR-PDCP (Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.8.2.1.7-1

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

eps-BearerIdentity

Same as the default EPS bearer Identity

drb-Identity

Same as the DRB identity associated with the default EPS bearer

pdcp-Config

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-7: Void

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-8: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [4], Table 4.6.1-8 with condition HO

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-2

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-AddMod

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-9

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15

Not present

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING containing RadioBearerConfig-MCG-DRB-RELEASE

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-10

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-9: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-AddMod (Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-17 using DRB configuration from Table 4.8.2.1.7-1 with condition AM

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

Same as the DRB associated with the default EPS bearer

}

}

physicalConfigDedicated

PhysicalConfigDedicated-DEFAULT using condition RBC-HO

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-10 RadioBearerConfig-MCG-DRB-RELEASE (Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition SRB_NR_PDCP AND Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1.. maxDRB)) OF DRB-Identity {

1 entry

DRB-Identity[1]

Same as the DRB associated with the default EPS bearer

entry 1

}

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-11: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 10, Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8 with Condition HO

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-2

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SRB-AddMod

As per Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-12

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-12 RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SRB-AddMod (Table 8.2.2.6.1.3.3-11)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SRB-AddMod ::= SEQUENCE {

2 entries

srb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod {

SRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

srb-Identity

Same as the SRB associated with SRB1

pdcp-verChange-r15

True

}

SRB-ToAddMod[2] SEQUENCE {

entry 2

srb-Identity

Same as the SRB associated with SRB2

pdcp-verChange-r15

True

}

}

}

8.2.2.7 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change without security key change

8.2.2.7.1 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change without security key change / EN-DC

8.2.2.7.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to MCG DRB (NR PDCP) }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and MCG (NR PDCP) }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(4)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(5)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to MCG DRB (NR PDCP) }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(6)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and MCG (NR PDCP) }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.7.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in TS 36.331, clauses 5.3.5.3 and TS 38.331: 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.1, 5.3.5.6.1 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if this is the first RRCConnectionReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC connection re-establishment procedure:

1> else:

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the radioResourceConfigDedicated:

3> perform the radio resource configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.10;

NOTE 3: If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the establishment of radio bearers other than SRB1, the UE may start using these radio bearers immediately, i.e. there is no need to wait for an outstanding acknowledgment of the SecurityModeComplete message.

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82, 5.3.5.3];

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82, 5.3.5.6];

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82, 5.3.5.6];

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82, 5.3.5.3];

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.1]

The network configures the UE with one Secondary Cell Group (SCG). For EN-DC, the MCG is configured as specified in TS 36.331 [10]. The network provides the configuration parameters for a cell group in the CellGroupConfig IE.

The UE performs the following actions based on a received CellGroupConfig IE:

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the spCellConfig with reconfigurationWithSync:

2> perform Reconfiguration with sync according to 5.3.5.5.2;

2> resume all suspended radio bearers and resume SCG transmission for all radio bearers, if suspended;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the rlc-BearerToReleaseList:

2> perform RLC bearer release as specified in 5.3.5.5.3;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the rlc-BearerToAddModList:

2> perform the RLC bearer addition/modification as specified in 5.3.5.5.4;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the mac-CellGroupConfig:

2> configure the MAC entity of this cell group as specified in 5.3.5.5.5;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the sCellToReleaseList:

2> perform SCell release as specified in 5.3.5.5.8;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the spCellConfig:

2> configure the SpCell as specified in 5.3.5.5.7;

1> if the CellGroupConfig contains the sCellToAddModList:

2> perform SCell addition/modification as specified in 5.3.5.5.9

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.1]

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the drb-ToReleaseList:

2> perform DRB release as specified in 5.3.5.6.4;

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the drb-ToAddModList:

2> perform DRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.5.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> configure the PDCP entity with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KUPenc) associated with the KeNB/S-KgNB as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

3> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

2> else:

3> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if reestablishPDCP is set:

3> configure the PDCP entity of this RadioBearerConfig to apply the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the KeNB/S-KgNB as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], section 5.1.2;

2> else, if recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

8.2.2.7.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.7.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.7.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.2.7.1.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify SCG DRB to Split DRB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on split DRB using NR radio path?

1

P

4

The SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to MCG DRB using NR PDCP.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB?

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to Split DRB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

3

P

9

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on split DRB using NR radio path?

3

P

10

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify Split DRB to SCG DRB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

11

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

4

P

12

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

4

P

13

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to MCG DRB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

14

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

5

P

15

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB?

5

P

16

SS transmits RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to SCG DRB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

17

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

6

P

18

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

6

P

8.2.2.7.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SCG-to-Split

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig-SCG-to-Split.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-2: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SCG-to-Split (step 1, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-27

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList

DRB-ToAddModList-SCG-to-Split

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-3: DRB-ToAddModList-SCG-to-Split (step 1, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-2A

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 Entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of SCG DRB

drb-Identity

2

SCG DRB Id

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-4: RadioBearerConfig-SCG-to-Split (step 1, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC_DRB

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-5: PDCP-Config (step 1, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-6: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

Not Present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

release

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING containing RadioBearerConfig-Split-to-MCG

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-7: Void

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-8: Void

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-9: RadioBearerConfig-Split-to-MCG (step 4, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

cnAssociation CHOICE {

eps-BearerIdentity

6

}

drb-Identity

2

recoverPDCP

true

pdcp-Config SEQUENCE {

Drb

Omit

moreThanOneRLC

Omit

t-Reordering

Omit

cipheringDisabled

Omit

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-9a: Void

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-10: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

Not Present

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING containing RRCReconfiguration-MCG-to-Split

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig-MCG-to-Split.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-11: RRCReconfiguration-MCG-to-Split (step7, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13, condition EN-DC

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-12: Void

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-13: RadioBearerConfig-MCG-to-Split (step 7, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

cnAssociation CHOICE {

eps-BearerIdentity

6

}

drb-Identity

2

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-14: PDCP-Config (step 7, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

}

ul-DataSplitThreshold

infinity

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-15: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 10, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL(2)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig-Split-to-SCG.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-16: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL(bid) (step 10, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-18C

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL(bid) ::= SEQUENCE {

bid is the bearer identity

drb-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF

one entry

DRB-Identity[1]

2

Split DRB Id

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-17: RadioBearerConfig-Split-to-SCG (step 10, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

cnAssociation CHOICE {

eps-BearerIdentity

6

}

drb-Identity

2

recoverPDCP

true

pdcp-Config::= SEQUENCE {

Drb

Omit

moreThanOneRLC

Omit

t-Reordering

Omit

cipheringDisabled

Omit

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-18: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 13, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SCG-to-MCG

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

release

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig-SCG-to-MCG.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-19: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SCG-to-MCG (step 13, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-27

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList

DRB-ToAddModList-SCG-to-MCG

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-20: DRB-ToAddModList-SCG-to-MCG (step 13, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-2A

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 Entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

eps-BearerIdentity

6

drb-Identity

2

}

}

Table 8.2.2.2.4.3.3-21: Void

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-22: Void

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-23: RadioBearerConfig-SCG-to-MCG (step 13, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC_DRB AND Recover_PDCP

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-24: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 16, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL(2)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING containing RRCReconfiguration-MCG-to-SCG

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig-MCG-to-SCG.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-25: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL (bid) (step 16, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-18C

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL(bid) ::= SEQUENCE {

bid is the bearer identity

drb-ToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF

one entry

DRB-Identity[1]

2

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-26: RRCReconfiguration-MCG-to-SCG (step 16, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-27: Void

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-28: RadioBearerConfig-MCG-to-SCG (step 16, Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

cnAssociation CHOICE {

eps-BearerIdentity

6

}

drb-Identity

2

recoverPDCP

true

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.3-29: RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (steps 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17 Table 8.2.2.7.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7] Table 4.6.1-9

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

scg-ConfigResponseNR-r15

Present

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

8.2.2.7.2 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change without security key change / NR-DC

8.2.2.7.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC with SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC with Split DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to MCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and MCG DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(4)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC with Split DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(5)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC with SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to MCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(6)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and MCG DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.7.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in TS 38.331: 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.5.7 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to nr-SCG:

3> include in the nr-SCG-Response the RRCReconfigurationComplete message;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.5.7]

The UE shall:

1> if the SpCellConfig contains the rlf-TimersAndConstants:

2> configure the RLF timers and constants for this cell group as specified in 5.3.5.5.6;

1> else if rlf-TimersAndConstants is not configured for this cell group:

2> if any DAPS bearer is configured:

3> use values for timers T301, T310, T311 and constants N310, N311 for the target cell group, as included in ue-TimersAndConstants received in SIB1;

2> else

3> use values for timers T301, T310, T311 and constants N310, N311, as included in ue-TimersAndConstants received in SIB1;

1> if the SpCellConfig contains spCellConfigDedicated:

2> configure the SpCell in accordance with the spCellConfigDedicated;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveUplinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active uplink bandwidth part;

2> consider the bandwidth part indicated in firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id if configured to be the active downlink bandwidth part;

2> if any of the reference signal(s) that are used for radio link monitoring are reconfigured by the received spCellConfigDedicated:

3> stop timer T310 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> stop timer T312 for the corresponding SpCell, if running;

3> reset the counters N310 and N311.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> configure the PDCP entity with the security algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the keys (KUPenc) associated with the KeNB/S-KgNB as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

3> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

2> else:

3> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if reestablishPDCP is set:

3> configure the PDCP entity of this RadioBearerConfig to apply the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the KeNB/S-KgNB as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], section 5.1.2;

2> else, if recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323;

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

8.2.2.7.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.7.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 10 is the PSCell.

– System information combination NR-4 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.3 is used in NR cells.

UE:

None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.7.2.3.2- Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify SCG DRB to Split DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on split DRB on PSCell?

1

P

4

The SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to MCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB?

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to Split DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

9

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on split DRB on PCell?

3

P

10

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify Split DRB to SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

11

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

4

P

12

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

4

P

13

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to MCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

14

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

5

P

15

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB?

5

P

16

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

17

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

6

P

18

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

6

P

8.2.2.7.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-2

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration)

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-3

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-5

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-2: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBm and Re-establish_RLC

entry 1

DRBm is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-3: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-4

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-4: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-3)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, Table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBm and Re-establish_RLC

entry 1

DRBm is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-5: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBm

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBm

DRBm is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

recoverPDCP

Not present

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-6

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-6: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-7: RRCReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

Release

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-8

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-8: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-7)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBm

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBm

DRBm is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

recoverPDCP

true

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-9: RRCReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration)

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-10

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-12

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-10: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-9)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-11

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-11: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-10)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, Table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBm

entry 1

DRBm is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-12: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-9)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBm

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

cnAssociation CHOICE {

sdap-Config

SDAP-Config

}

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBm

recoverPDCP

true

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-13: RRCReconfiguration (step 10, Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-14

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-15

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-14: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-13)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

Logical ChannelID of DRBm

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-15: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-13)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBm

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBm

DRBm is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

recoverPDCP

True

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-16: RRCReconfiguration (step 13, Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-17

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

Release

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-18

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-17: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-16)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions DRBn

DRBn is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-18: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-16)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBm

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBm

DRBm is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

recoverPDCP

True

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-19: RRCReconfiguration (step 16, Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-20

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration)

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-21

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-23

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-20: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-19)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

Logical ChannelID of DRBm

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-21: RRCReconfiguration (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-19)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

See Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-22

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-22: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-21)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBm

entry 1

DRBn is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-23: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-19)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBm

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBm

DRBm is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

recoverPDCP

True

}

}

securityConfig

Not present

}

Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.3-24: RRCReconfigurationComplete (step 2, 8 and 17, Table 8.2.2.7.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-14 with condition NR-DC

8.2.2.7.3 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change without security key change / NE-DC

8.2.2.7.3.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC with SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC with Split DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to MCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC and MCG DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to Split DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(4)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC with Split DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(5)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC with SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to MCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(6)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC and MCG DRB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to SCG DRB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.7.3.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3 and TS 36.331 clauses 5.3.5.3 and 5.3.10.3a1. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO, CPA or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to eutra-SCG:

4> perform the RRC connection reconfiguration as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.3.5.3 for the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included in eutra-SCG;

2> else (mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to release):

3> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to eutra-SCG:

3> include in the eutra-SCG-Response the E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message in accordance with TS 36.331 [10] clause 5.3.5.3;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the UE is configured with NE-DC:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message was included in an NR RRCResume message:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCResumeComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.13.4;

2> else:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> else:

2> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.3a1]

For the drb-Identity value for which this procedure is initiated, the UE shall:

1> if drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value; and drb-Identity value is not part of the current UE configuration (i.e. DC specific DRB establishment):

2> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value (i.e. add split DRB):

3> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current MCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config included in drb-ToAddModList;

3> establish an MCG RLC entity and an MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config, logicalChannelIdentity and logicalChannelConfig included in drb-ToAddModList;

3> establish an SCG RLC entity and an SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

2> else (i.e. add SCG DRB):

3> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current SCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> establish a primary SCG RLC entity or entities and a primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

4> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

2> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> else (i.e. DC specific DRB modification; drb-ToAddModList and/ or drb-ToAddModListSCG received):

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is a split DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-TypeChange is included and set to toMCG (i.e. split to MCG):

4> release the SCG RLC entity or entities and the SCG DTCH logical channel(s);

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> establish a secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

3> else (i.e. reconfigure split):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the MCG RLC entity and/ or the MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the SCG RLC entity and/ or the SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an SCG DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-TypeChange is included and set to toMCG (i.e. SCG to MCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity with the current MCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the SCG RLC entity or entities (both primary and secondary, if configured) and the SCG DTCH logical channel (both primary and secondary, if configured) to be an MCG RLC entity or entities and an MCG DTCH logical channel;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config, logicalChannelIdentity and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

3> else (i.e. drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value i.e. reconfigure SCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> reconfigure the primary SCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an MCG DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-Type is included and set to split (i.e. MCG to split):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> establish an SCG RLC entity and an SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> else (i.e. drb-Type is included and set to scg i.e. MCG to SCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity with the current SCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> reconfigure the MCG RLC entity or entities (both primary and secondary, if configured) and the MCG DTCH logical channel (both primary and secondary, if configured) to be an SCG RLC entity or entities and an SCG DTCH logical channel;

4> reconfigure the primary SCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

8.2.2.7.3.3 Test description

8.2.2.7.3.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NE-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NE-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.7.3.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.7.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify SCG DRB to Split DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on split DRB using E-UTRA radio path?

1

P

4

The SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message to modify Split DRB to MCG DRB using NR PDCP.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB?

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to Split DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

3

P

9

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on split DRB using E-UTRA radio path?

3

P

10

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RadioBearerConfig to modify Split DRB to SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

11

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

4

P

12

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

4

P

13

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify SCG DRB to MCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

14

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

5

P

15

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB?

5

P

16

SS transmits RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify MCG DRB to SCG DRB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

17

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

6

P

18

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB?

6

P

8.2.2.7.3.3.3 Specific message contents

FFS

8.2.2.8 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change with security key change

8.2.2.8.1 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change with security key change / EN-DC

8.2.2.8.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated SCG DRB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to keNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and MN terminated SCG DRB established with security key keNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated SCG DRB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SN terminated Split DRB established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated Split DRB to MN terminated Split DRB with security key change to keNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(4)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and MN terminated Split DRB established with security key keNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated Split DRB to SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(5)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to MN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) with security key change to keNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(6)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and MN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) established with security key keNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(7)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SN terminated Split DRB established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated Split DRB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to keNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(8)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and MN terminated SCG DRB established with security key keNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated SCG DRB to SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(9)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to keNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.8.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3, TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.6.1 and 5.3.5.6.5, TS 37.340, clause Annex A: Table A-1: L2 handling for bearer type change with and without security key change. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-Config and it is set to release: or

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes endc-ReleaseAndAdd and it is set to TRUE:

2> perform ENDC release as specified in TS38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.10;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the sk-Counter:

2> perform key update procedure as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.7;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if this is the first RRCConnectionReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC connection re-establishment procedure:

2> resume SRB2 and all DRBs that are suspended, if any, including RBs configured with NR PDCP;

NOTE 4: The handling of the radio bearers after the successful completion of the PDCP re-establishment, e.g. the re-transmission of unacknowledged PDCP SDUs (as well as the associated status reporting), the handling of the SN and the HFN, is specified in TS 36.323 [8].

NOTE 5: The UE may discard SRB2 messages and data that it receives prior to completing the reconfiguration used to resume these bearers.

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes perCC-GapIndicationRequest:

3> include perCC-GapIndicationList and numFreqEffective;

2> if the frequencies are configured for reduced measurement performance:

3> include numFreqEffectiveReduced;

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> set the content of RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent, or;

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent:

3> include the uplinkTxDirectCurrentList;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> construct RRCReconfigurationComplete message and submit it via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an SCG:

4> initiate the random access procedure on the SpCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

3> else:

4> the procedure ends;

NOTE: The order the UE sends the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

2> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB3):

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration .

NOTE: For EN-DC, in the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB1, the random access is triggered by RRC layer itself as there is not necessarily other UL transmission. In the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB3, the random access is triggered by the MAC layer due to arrival of RRCReconfigurationComplete.

1> else:

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

2> if this is the first RRCReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC re-establishment procedure:

3> resume SRB2 and DRBs that are suspended;

1> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG or SCG, and when MAC of an NR cell group successfully completes a random access procedure triggered above;

2> stop timer T304 for that cell group;

2> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell, if any;

2> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of that target SpCell;

2> if the reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG:

3> if T390 is running:

4> stop timer T390 for all access categories;

4> perform the actions as specified in 5.3.14.4.

3> if RRCReconfiguration does not include dedicatedSIB1-Delivery and

3> if the active downlink BWP, which is indicated by the firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id for the target SpCell of the MCG, has a common search space configured by searchSpaceSIB1:

4> acquire the SIB1, which is scheduled as specified in TS 38.213 [13], of the target SpCell of the MCG;

4> upon acquiring SIB1, perform the actions specified in clause 5.2.2.4.2;

2> the procedure ends.

NOTE: The UE is only required to acquire broadcasted SIB1 if the UE can acquire it without disrupting unicast data reception, i.e. the broadcast and unicast beams are quasi co-located.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.1]

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the drb-ToAddModList:

2> perform DRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.5.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> else:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the UE is operating in EN-DC:

3>if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

4> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

3> else:

4> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> if target RAT is E-UTRA/5GC, or:

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10, 5.4.2.3], i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> else:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB), as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], clause 5.1.2;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323 [5];

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

NOTE 1: Void.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KeNB or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of cipheriong or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

[TS 37.340, Annex A]

This subclause provides for information an overview on L2 handling for bearer type change in EN-DC, with and without security key change (from KeNB to S-KgNB and from S-KgNB to KeNB), i.e. with and without a change of the termination point.

Table A-1: L2 handling for bearer type change with and without security key change

Bearertype change from row
to col

MCG

Split

SCG

no key change

with key change
(KeNB <->

S-KgNB)

no key change

with key change
(KeNB <->

S-KgNB)

no key

change

with key change
(KeNB <->

S-KgNB)

MCG

N/A

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 1

MCG MAC: See Note 1

SCG RLC: No action

SCG MAC: No action

PDCP: Reconfigure

MCG RLC: No action

MCG MAC: No action

SCG RLC: Establish

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 1

MCG MAC: See Note 1

SCG RLC: Establish

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP: Recovery

MCG RLC: See Note 3

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: Establish

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 3

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: Establish

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

Split

PDCP: Recovery

MCG RLC: No action

MCG MAC: No action

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP:
Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 1

MCG MAC: See Note 1

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

N/A

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 1

MCG MAC: See Note 1

SCG RLC:
See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

PDCP: Recovery

MCG RLC: See Note 3

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC:
No action

SCG MAC:
No action

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 3

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC:
See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

SCG

PDCP: Recovery

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP: Reconfigure

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: No action

SCG MAC: No action

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

N/A

PDCP: Re-establish

MCG RLC: No action

MCG MAC: No action

SCG RLC: See Note 1

SCG MAC: See note 1

NOTE 1: For EN-DC and NGEN-DC MCG, NE-DC SCG: the MAC/RLC behaviour depends on the solution selected by the network. It can be PCell handover (for EN-DC and NGEN-DC) or PSCell change (for NE-DC), which triggers MAC reset and RLC re-establishment. Alternatively, the logical channel identity can be changed, either via RLC bearer release and add for the same DRB (including RLC re-establishment), or via reconfiguration of the RLC bearer with RLC-re-establishment.

For EN-DC and NGEN-DC SCG, NE-DC MCG, NR-DC MCG and SCG: the MAC/RLC behaviour depends on the solution selected by the network. It can be reconfiguration with sync, with MAC reset and RLC re-establishment. Alternatively, the logical channel identity can be changed via RLC bearer release and add.

NOTE 2: Void

NOTE 3: For EN-DC and NGEN-DC: Re-establishment and release. For NE-DC and NR-DC: Release.

NOTE 4: For NE-DC: Re-establishment and release. For EN-DC, NGEN-DC and NR-DC: Release.

8.2.2.8.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.8.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.8.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated SCG DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to keNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

1

P

4

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify MN terminated SCG DRB with security key keNB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated Split DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated Split DRB with security key change to keNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

3

P

9

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

3

P

10

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig and nr-Config set to release to modify MN terminated Split DRB with security key keNB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

11

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

4

P

12

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB#2?

4

P

13

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify SN terminated MCG DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to keNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

14

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

5

P

15

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB#2?

5

P

16

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify MN terminated MCG DRB with security key keNB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

17

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

6

P

18

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

6

P

19

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated Split DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to keNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

20

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

7

P

21

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

7

P

22

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify MN terminated SCG DRB with security key keNB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

23

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

8

P

24

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB#2?

8

P

25

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated MCG DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to keNB.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration (RRCReconfiguration)

26

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message containing NR RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (RRCReconfigurationComplete)

9

P

27

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

9

P

8.2.2.8.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup according TS 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC_HO

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-2: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-3: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-4: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with conditions EN-DC_DRB and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

master

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-5: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_SCG-to-SN_Split

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup according TS 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC_HO

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-6: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_SCG-to-SN_Split (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-19AAAAAB

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-EN-DC-Split ::= SEQUENCE {

srb-ToAddModList

Not present

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1]

DRB-ToAddMod-EN-DC-Split

entry 1

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-7: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-8: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-9: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC_DRB AND Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

secondary

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-10: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-9)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

}

ul-DataSplitThreshold

infinity

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-11: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 7.1.3.2.1.3.3-1A

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SN_Split-to-MN_Split

securityConfigHO

SecurityConfigHO-DEFAULT

HO, HO-TO-EUTRA

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup according TS 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC_HO

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-12: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SN_Split-to-MN_Split (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-11)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-18

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-HO-TO-EUTRA(1, 0) ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList

DRB-ToAddModList-SN_Split-to-MN_Split

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-13: DRB-ToAddModList-SN_Split-to-MN_Split (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-12)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-2A

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 Entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of Split DRB

drb-Identity

2

Split DRB Id

rlc-Config-v1510 SEQUENCE {

reestablishRLC-r15

true

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-14: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-15: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-16: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-11)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC_DRB AND Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

master

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-17: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 10, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 7.1.3.2.1.3.3-1A

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_Split-to-SN_MCG

securityConfigHO

SecurityConfigHO-DEFAULT

HO, HO-TO-EUTRA

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

release

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-18: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_Split-to-SN_MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-17)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-18

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-HO-TO-EUTRA(1, 0)::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList

DRB-ToAddModList-MN_Split-to-SN_MCG

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-19: DRB-ToAddModList-MN_Split-to-SN_MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-18)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-2A

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 Entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of Split DRB

drb-Identity

2

Split DRB Id

rlc-Config-v1510 SEQUENCE {

reestablishRLC-r15

true

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-20: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-21: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-22: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-17)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC and Re-establish_PDCP

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-23: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 13, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 7.1.3.2.1.3.3-1A

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SN_MCG-to-MN_MCG

securityConfigHO

SecurityConfigHO-DEFAULT

HO, HO-TO-EUTRA

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-24: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-SN_MCG-to-MN_MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-23)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-18

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-HO-TO-EUTRA(1, 0) ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList

DRB-ToAddModList-SN_MCG-to-MN_MCG

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-25: DRB-ToAddModList-SN_MCG-to-MN_MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-24)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-2A

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 Entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of MCG DRB

drb-Identity

2

MCG DRB Id

rlc-Config-v1510 SEQUENCE {

reestablishRLC-r15

true

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-25a: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-25b: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-26: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-23)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC_DRB AND Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

master

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-27: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 16, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

mobilityControlInfo

MobilityControlInfo-HO-SameCell

As per Table 7.1.3.2.1.3.3-1A

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_MCG-to-SN_Split

securityConfigHO

SecurityConfigHO-DEFAULT

HO, HO-TO-EUTRA

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup according TS 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-28: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_MCG-to-SN_Split (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-27)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-18

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-HO-TO-EUTRA(1, 0) ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList

DRB-ToAddModList-MN_MCG-to-SN_Split

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-29: DRB-ToAddModList-MN_MCG-to-SN_Split (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-30)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-2A

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 Entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of MCG DRB

drb-Identity

2

MCG DRB Id

rlc-Config-v1510 SEQUENCE {

reestablishRLC-r15

true

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-30: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-31: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-32: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-27)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC_DRB AND Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

secondary

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-33: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-32)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

}

ul-DataSplitThreshold

infinity

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-34: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 19, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL(2)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup according TS 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC_HO

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-35: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-36: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-37: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-34)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC AND Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

master

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-38: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 22, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_SCG-to-SN_MCG

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

release

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-39: RadioResourceConfigDedicated-MN_SCG-to-SN_MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-38)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-27

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList

DRB-ToAddModList-MN_SCG-to-SN_MCG

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-40: DRB-ToAddModList-MN_SCG-to-SN_MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-39)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.3-2A

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

DRB-ToAddModList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 Entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

eps-BearerIdentity

6

Dedicated EPS bearer Id of SCG DRB

drb-Identity

2

SCG DRB Id

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-41: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-42: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-43: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-38)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

secondary

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-44: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 25, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

radioResourceConfigDedicated

RadioResourceConfigDedicated-DRB-REL(2)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-Config-r15 CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig-r15

OCTET STRING including the RRCReconfiguration message and the IE secondaryCellGroup according TS 38.508-1 [4], table 4.6.1-13 with condition EN-DC_HO

}

}

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-45: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-46: Void

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-47: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-44)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition EN-DC and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

master

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.3-48: RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete (steps 2, 5, 8, 17, 20, 23, 26, Table 8.2.2.8.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7] Table 4.6.1-9

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

scg-ConfigResponseNR-r15

Present

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

8.2.2.8.2 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change with security key change / NR-DC

8.2.2.8.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated SCG DRB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to kgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and MN terminated SCG DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated SCG DRB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and SN terminated Split DRB established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated Split DRB to MN terminated Split DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(4)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and MN terminated Split DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated Split DRB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(5)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and SN terminated MCG DRB established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated MCG DRB to MN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(6)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and MN terminated MCG DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated MCG DRB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(7)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and SN terminated Split DRB established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated Split DRB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(8)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and MN terminated SCG DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated SCG DRB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(9)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC and SN terminated MCG DRB established with security key s-KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated MCG DRB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.8.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3, 5.3.5.6.1 and 5.3.5.6.5, TS 37.340, clause Annex A: Table A-1: L2 handling for bearer type change with and without security key change. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;

1> set the content of RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent, or;

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent:

3> include the uplinkTxDirectCurrentList;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> construct RRCReconfigurationComplete message and submit it via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an SCG:

4> initiate the random access procedure on the SpCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

3> else:

4> the procedure ends;

NOTE: The order the UE sends the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

2> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB3):

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration .

NOTE: For EN-DC, in the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB1, the random access is triggered by RRC layer itself as there is not necessarily other UL transmission. In the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB3, the random access is triggered by the MAC layer due to arrival of RRCReconfigurationComplete.

1> else:

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

2> if this is the first RRCReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC re-establishment procedure:

3> resume SRB2 and DRBs that are suspended;

1> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG or SCG, and when MAC of an NR cell group successfully completes a random access procedure triggered above;

2> stop timer T304 for that cell group;

2> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell, if any;

2> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of that target SpCell;

2> if the reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG:

3> if T390 is running:

4> stop timer T390 for all access categories;

4> perform the actions as specified in 5.3.14.4.

3> if RRCReconfiguration does not include dedicatedSIB1-Delivery and

3> if the active downlink BWP, which is indicated by the firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id for the target SpCell of the MCG, has a common search space configured by searchSpaceSIB1:

4> acquire the SIB1, which is scheduled as specified in TS 38.213 [13], of the target SpCell of the MCG;

4> upon acquiring SIB1, perform the actions specified in clause 5.2.2.4.2;

2> the procedure ends.

NOTE: The UE is only required to acquire broadcasted SIB1 if the UE can acquire it without disrupting unicast data reception, i.e. the broadcast and unicast beams are quasi co-located.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.1]

The UE shall perform the following actions based on a received RadioBearerConfig IE:

1> if the RadioBearerConfig includes the drb-ToAddModList:

2> perform DRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.5.6.5.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> else:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the UE is operating in EN-DC:

3>if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

4> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

3> else:

4> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> if target RAT is E-UTRA/5GC, or:

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10, 5.4.2.3], i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> else:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB), as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], clause 5.1.2;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323 [5];

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

NOTE 1: Void.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KeNB or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of cipheriong or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

[TS 37.340, Annex A]

This clause provides for information an overview on L2 handling for bearer type change in MR-DC, with and without a security key change due to a change of the termination point.

Table A-1: L2 handling for bearer type change with and without a security key change due to a change of the termination point

Bearer type change from row
to col

MCG

Split

SCG

no change of termination point

(no key change)

change of termination point

(key change)

no change of termination point

(no key change)

change of termination point

(key change)

no change of termination point

(no key

change)

change of termination point

(key change)

MCG

N/A

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 1

MCG MAC:

See Note 1

SCG RLC:

No action

SCG MAC:

No action

PDCP: Reconfigure

MCG RLC: No action

MCG MAC: No action

SCG RLC: Establish

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 1

MCG MAC:

See Note 1

SCG RLC:

Establish

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:

Recovery

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

Establish

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

Establish

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

Split

PDCP:

Recovery

MCG RLC:

No action

MCG MAC:

No action

SCG RLC:

See Note 4

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:
Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 1

MCG MAC: See Note 1

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

N/A

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 1

MCG MAC:

See Note 1

SCG RLC:
See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

PDCP: Recovery

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:
No action

SCG MAC:
No action

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:
See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

SCG

PDCP:

Recovery

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

Establish

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

See Note 4

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:

Reconfigure

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: No action

SCG MAC: No action

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

Establish

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

N/A

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

No action

MCG MAC:

No action

SCG RLC:

See Note 1

SCG MAC:

See Note 1

NOTE 1: For EN-DC and NGEN-DC MCG, NE-DC SCG: the MAC/RLC behaviour depends on the solution selected by the network. It can be PCell handover (for EN-DC and NGEN-DC) or PSCell change (for NE-DC), which triggers MAC reset and RLC re-establishment. Alternatively, the logical channel identity can be changed, either via RLC bearer release and add for the same DRB (including RLC re-establishment), or via reconfiguration of the RLC bearer with RLC-re-establishment.

For EN-DC and NGEN-DC SCG, NE-DC MCG, NR-DC MCG and SCG: the MAC/RLC behaviour depends on the solution selected by the network. It can be reconfiguration with sync, with MAC reset and RLC re-establishment. Alternatively, the logical channel identity can be changed via RLC bearer release and add.

NOTE 2: Void

NOTE 3: For EN-DC and NGEN-DC: Re-establishment and release. For NE-DC and NR-DC: Release.

NOTE 4: For NE-DC: Re-establishment and release. For EN-DC, NGEN-DC and NR-DC: Release.

8.2.2.8.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.8.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 10 is the PSCell.

– System information combination NR-4 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.3 is used in NR cells.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state NR RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.8.2.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig message to modify SN terminated SCG DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRBn?

1

P

4

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig message to modify MN terminated SCG DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRBn using SCG path?

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig message to modify SN terminated Split DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated Split DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

3

P

9

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRBn using SCG path?

3

P

10

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig and nr-Config set to release to modify MN terminated Split DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

11

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

4

P

12

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRBn?

4

P

13

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify SN terminated MCG DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

14

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

5

P

15

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRBn?

5

P

16

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig message to modify MN terminated MCG DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

17

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

6

P

18

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRBn using SCG path?

6

P

19

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig message to modify SN terminated Split DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

20

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

7

P

21

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRBn?

7

P

22

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig message to modify MN terminated SCG DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

23

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

8

P

24

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRBn?

8

P

25

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig message to modify SN terminated MCG DRB with security key s-KgNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

26

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message including nr-SCG-Response?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

9

P

27

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRBn?

9

P

8.2.2.8.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration-SCG)

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-SCG

See Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1B

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1A: RadioBearerConfig-SCG ( Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-21, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-28)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRB1 and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBn

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config with Condition Split

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1B: RadioBearerConfig-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRB1 and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBn

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-2: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-3: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition PSCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

CellGroupId as per TS38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-20 condition

NR-DC_SCG

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBn and Re-establish_RLC

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-MCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration-SCG)

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-SCG

See Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4A

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4A: RadioBearerConfig-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-17)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRB1 and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBn

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config-Split

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4B

}

}

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

secondary

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4B: PDCP-Config-Split (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4A

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

logicalChannel

LogicalChannelIdentity

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-5: CellGroupConfig-MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions DRBn

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-6: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-SCG

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-7: CellGroupConfig-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-6)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition PSCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

cellGroupId

CellGroupId as per TS38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-20 condition

NR-DC_SCG

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBm and Re-establish_RLC

entry 1

DRBn is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8: RRCReconfiguration (step 7, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

RadioBearerConfig according to TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-132: RadioBearerConfig with conditions SRB1, SRB2, DRBm, and Re-establish_PDCP

DRBm is DRB(s) on MCG are allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-MCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration-SCG)

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-SCG

See Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8A

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8A: RadioBearerConfig-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRB1 and Re-establish_PDCP

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBn

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config-Split

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8B

}

}

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

master

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8B: PDCP-Config-Split (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8A)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99 with condition Split

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

logicalChannel

LogicalChannelIdentity

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-9: CellGroupConfig-MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19 with condition PCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions SRB1, SRB2, DRBm, DRBn and Re-establish_RLC

DRBm is DRB(s) on MCG and DRBn is DRB on SCG are allocated according to internal TTCN mapping.

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-10: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-8)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-11: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-10)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBn and Re-establish_RLC

entry 1

DRBn is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-12: RRCReconfiguration (step 10, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

release

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-13: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-12)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19 with condition PCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions SRB1, SRB2, DRBn, DRBm and Re-establish_RLC

DRBn and DRBm are allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-14: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-12)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

cnAssociation CHOICE {

sdap-Config

SDAP-Config

}

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBm

reestablishPDCP

True

recoverPDCP

Not present

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

Secondary

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-15: RRCReconfiguration (step 13, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

RadioBearerConfig according to TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-132: RadioBearerConfig with conditions SRB1, SRB2, DRBn, DRBm, Re-establish_PDCP

DRBn and DRBm is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-16: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-15)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19 with condition PCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions SRB1, SRB2, DRBn, DRBm and Re-establish_RLC

DRBn on MCG and DRBm on SCG are allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-17: RRCReconfiguration (step 16, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig

RadioBearerConfig according to TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-132: RadioBearerConfig with conditions SRB1, SRB2, DRBm, Re-establish_PDCP

DRBm on MCG is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-MCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration-SCG)

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-SCG

See Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-4A

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-18: CellGroupConfig-MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-17)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19 with condition PCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions SRB1, SRB2, DRBn, DRBm and Re-establish_RLC

DRBn on MCG and DRBm on SCG are allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-19: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-17)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-SCG

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-20: CellGroupConfig-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-19)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBn

entry 1

DRBn is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-21: RRCReconfiguration (step 19, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-MCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration-SCG)

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-SCG

See Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1A

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-22: CellGroupConfig-MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-21)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition PSCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

Logical ChannelID of DRBn

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-23: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-21)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-SCG

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-24: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-23)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition PSCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBn and Re-establish_RLC

entry 1

DRBn is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-25: RRCReconfiguration (step 22, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

Release

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-26: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-25)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.3-19

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions DRBn

DRBn of SCG are allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-27: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-26)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

cnAssociation CHOICE {

sdap-Config

SDAP-Config

}

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity using condition DRBn

DRBn of SCG are allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

reestablishPDCP

True

recoverPDCP

Not present

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

securityConfig SEQUENCE {

keyToUse

Secondary

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-28: RRCReconfiguration (step 25, Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

masterCellGroup

CellGroupConfig-MCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING CellGroupConfig)

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig CHOICE {

setup SEQUENCE {

mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup CHOICE {

nr-SCG

OCTET STRING (CONTAINING RRCReconfiguration-SCG)

}

}

}

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-SCG

See Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-1A

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-29: CellGroupConfig-MCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-28)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition PSCell_Change

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToReleaseList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF LogicalChannelIdentity {

LogicalChannelIdentity[1]

Logical ChannelID of DRBn

}

}

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-30: RRCReconfiguration-SCG (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-28)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

secondaryCellGroup

CellGroupConfig

Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-31: CellGroupConfig (Table 8.2.2.8.2.3.3-30)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1, table 4.6.1-3 with condition NR-DC_SCG

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

CellGroupConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

rlc-BearerToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxLC-ID)) OF RLC-BearerConfig {

1 entry

RLC-BearerConfig[1]

RLC-BearerConfig as per TS 38.508-1[4] Table 4.6.3-148: RLC-BearerConfig with conditions AM and DRBn

entry 1

DRBn is allocated according to internal TTCN mapping

}

}

8.2.2.8.3 Bearer Modification / Handling for bearer type change with security key change / NE-DC

8.2.2.8.3.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC and SCG }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated SCG DRB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and and MN terminated SCG DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated SCG DRB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KeNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(3)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and SN terminated Split DRB established with security key s-KeNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated Split DRB to MN terminated Split DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(4)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, and MN terminated Split DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated Split DRB to SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) with security key change to s-KeNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(5)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, and SN terminated MCG DRB established with security key s-KeNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to MN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(6)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, and MN terminated MCG DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KeNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(7)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, and SN terminated Split DRB established with security key s-KeNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated Split DRB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(8)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, and MN terminated SCG DRB established with security key KgNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the MN terminated SCG DRB to SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) with security key change to s-KeNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(9)

with { UE in NR RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, and SN terminated MCG DRB established with security key s-KeNB }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to modify the SN terminated MCG DRB (NR PDCP) to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB }

then { UE reconfigures the DRB and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.8.3.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3 and TS 36.331 clauses 5.3.5.3 and 5.3.10.3a1, TS 37.340, clause Annex A. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO, CPA or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to eutra-SCG:

4> perform the RRC connection reconfiguration as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.3.5.3 for the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included in eutra-SCG;

2> else (mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to release):

3> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to eutra-SCG:

3> include in the eutra-SCG-Response the E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message in accordance with TS 36.331 [10] clause 5.3.5.3;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the UE is configured with NE-DC:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message was included in an NR RRCResume message:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCResumeComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.13.4;

2> else:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> else:

2> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.3a1]

For the drb-Identity value for which this procedure is initiated, the UE shall:

1> if drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value; and drb-Identity value is not part of the current UE configuration (i.e. DC specific DRB establishment):

2> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value (i.e. add split DRB):

3> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current MCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config included in drb-ToAddModList;

3> establish an MCG RLC entity and an MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config, logicalChannelIdentity and logicalChannelConfig included in drb-ToAddModList;

3> establish an SCG RLC entity and an SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

2> else (i.e. add SCG DRB):

3> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current SCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> establish a primary SCG RLC entity or entities and a primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

4> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

2> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> else (i.e. DC specific DRB modification; drb-ToAddModList and/ or drb-ToAddModListSCG received):

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is a split DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-TypeChange is included and set to toMCG (i.e. split to MCG):

4> release the SCG RLC entity or entities and the SCG DTCH logical channel(s);

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> establish a secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

3> else (i.e. reconfigure split):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the MCG RLC entity and/ or the MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the SCG RLC entity and/ or the SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an SCG DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-TypeChange is included and set to toMCG (i.e. SCG to MCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity with the current MCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the SCG RLC entity or entities (both primary and secondary, if configured) and the SCG DTCH logical channel (both primary and secondary, if configured) to be an MCG RLC entity or entities and an MCG DTCH logical channel;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config, logicalChannelIdentity and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

3> else (i.e. drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value i.e. reconfigure SCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> reconfigure the primary SCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an MCG DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-Type is included and set to split (i.e. MCG to split):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> establish an SCG RLC entity and an SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> else (i.e. drb-Type is included and set to scg i.e. MCG to SCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity with the current SCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> reconfigure the MCG RLC entity or entities (both primary and secondary, if configured) and the MCG DTCH logical channel (both primary and secondary, if configured) to be an SCG RLC entity or entities and an SCG DTCH logical channel;

4> reconfigure the primary SCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

[TS 37.340, Annex A]

This clause provides for information an overview on L2 handling for bearer type change in MR-DC, with and without a security key change due to a change of the termination point.

Table A-1: L2 handling for bearer type change with and without a security key change due to a change of the termination point.

Bearer type change from row
to col

MCG

Split

SCG

no change of termination point

(no key change)

change of termination point

(key change)

no change of termination point

(no key change)

change of termination point

(key change)

no change of termination point

(no key

change)

change of termination point

(key change)

MCG

N/A

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 1

MCG MAC:

See Note 1

SCG RLC:

No action

SCG MAC:

No action

PDCP: Reconfigure

MCG RLC: No action

MCG MAC: No action

SCG RLC: Establish

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 1

MCG MAC:

See Note 1

SCG RLC:

Establish

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:

Recovery

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

Establish

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

Establish

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

Split

PDCP:

Recovery

MCG RLC:

No action

MCG MAC:

No action

SCG RLC:

See Note 4

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:
Re-establish

MCG RLC: See Note 1

MCG MAC: See Note 1

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

N/A

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 1

MCG MAC:

See Note 1

SCG RLC:
See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

PDCP: Recovery

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:
No action

SCG MAC:
No action

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

See Note 3

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:
See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

SCG

PDCP:

Recovery

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: See Note 4

SCG MAC: Reconfigure

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

Establish

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

See Note 4

SCG MAC:

Reconfigure

PDCP:

Reconfigure

MCG RLC: Establish

MCG MAC: Reconfigure

SCG RLC: No action

SCG MAC: No action

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

Establish

MCG MAC:

Reconfigure

SCG RLC:

See Note 1

SCG MAC:
See Note 1

N/A

PDCP:

Re-establish

MCG RLC:

No action

MCG MAC:

No action

SCG RLC:

See Note 1

SCG MAC:

See Note 1

NOTE 1: For EN-DC and NGEN-DC MCG, NE-DC SCG: the MAC/RLC behaviour depends on the solution selected by the network. It can be PCell handover (for EN-DC and NGEN-DC) or PSCell change (for NE-DC), which triggers MAC reset and RLC re-establishment. Alternatively, the logical channel identity can be changed, either via RLC bearer release and add for the same DRB (including RLC re-establishment), or via reconfiguration of the RLC bearer with RLC-re-establishment.

For EN-DC and NGEN-DC SCG, NE-DC MCG, NR-DC MCG and SCG: the MAC/RLC behaviour depends on the solution selected by the network. It can be reconfiguration with sync, with MAC reset and RLC re-establishment. Alternatively, the logical channel identity can be changed via RLC bearer release and add.

NOTE 2: Void

NOTE 3: For EN-DC and NGEN-DC: Re-establishment and release. For NE-DC and NR-DC: Release.

NOTE 4: For NE-DC: Re-establishment and release. For EN-DC, NGEN-DC and NR-DC: Release.

8.2.2.8.3.3 Test description

8.2.2.8.3.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NE-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NE-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and SCG) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.8.3.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.8.3.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated SCG DRB with security key s-KeNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete) message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

1

P

4

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCReconfiguration message to modify MN terminated SCG DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KeNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete) message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

2

P

7

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated Split DRB with security key s-KeNB to MN terminated Split DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

8

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete) message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

3

P

9

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

3

P

10

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RadioBearerConfig to release to modify MN terminated Split DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KeNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

11

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

4

P

12

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB#2?

4

P

13

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to modify SN terminated MCG DRB with security key s-KeNB to MN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

14

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

5

P

15

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB#2?

5

P

16

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCReconfiguration message to modify MN terminated MCG DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated Split DRB with security key change to s-KeNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

17

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete) message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

6

P

18

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path?

6

P

19

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated Split DRB with security key s-KeNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

20

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete) message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

7

P

21

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

7

P

22

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCReconfiguration message to modify MN terminated SCG DRB with security key KgNB to SN terminated MCG DRB with security key change to s-KeNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

23

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete) message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

8

P

24

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on MCG DRB#2?

8

P

25

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing E-UTRA RRCReconfiguration message to modify SN terminated MCG DRB with security key s-KeNB to MN terminated SCG DRB with security key change to KgNB.

<–

RRCReconfiguration (RRCConnectionReconfiguration)

26

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message containing E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete) message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete (RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete)

9

P

27

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on SCG DRB#2?

9

P

8.2.2.8.3.3.3 Specific message contents

FFS

8.2.2.9 Bearer Modification / Uplink data path / Split DRB Reconfiguration

8.2.2.9.1 Bearer Modification / Uplink data path / Split DRB Reconfiguration / EN-DC

8.2.2.9.1.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to change the primaryPath to E-UTRA radio path from NR }

then { UE changes the uplink data path to E-UTRA radio path and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with EN-DC, and, MCG(s) (E-UTRA PDCP) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message to change the primaryPath from E-UTRA radio path to NR }

then { UE changes the uplink data path to NR radio path and sends an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.9.1.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3, TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-Config and it is set to release: or

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes endc-ReleaseAndAdd and it is set to TRUE:

2> perform ENDC release as specified in TS38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.10;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the sk-Counter:

2> perform key update procedure as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.7;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> perform NR RRC Reconfiguration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig1:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration includes the nr-RadioBearerConfig2:

2> perform radio bearer configuration as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes perCC-GapIndicationRequest:

3> include perCC-GapIndicationList and numFreqEffective;

2> if the frequencies are configured for reduced measurement performance:

3> include numFreqEffectiveReduced;

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

3> include scg-ConfigResponseNR in accordance with TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration:

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message contains the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:

2> perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2

1> set the content of RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent, or;

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup containing the reportUplinkTxDirectCurrent:

3> include the uplinkTxDirectCurrentList;;

1> if the UE is configured with E-UTRA nr-SecondaryCellGroupConfig (MCG is E-UTRA):

2> if RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1:

3> construct RRCReconfigurationComplete message and submit it via the EUTRA MCG embedded in E-UTRA RRC message RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an SCG:

4> initiate the random access procedure on the SpCell, as specified in TS 38.321 [3];

3> else:

4> the procedure ends;

NOTE: The order the UE sends the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message and performs the Random Access procedure towards the SCG is left to UE implementation.

2> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB3):

3> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB3 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration.

NOTE: For EN-DC, in the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB1, the random access is triggered by RRC layer itself as there is not necessarily other UL transmission. In the case RRCReconfiguration is received via SRB3, the random access is triggered by the MAC layer due to arrival of RRCReconfigurationComplete.

1 > else:

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the newconfiguration;

2> if this is the first RRCReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC re-establishment procedure:

3> resume SRB2 and DRBs that are suspended;

1> if reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG or SCG, and when MAC of an NR cell group successfully completes a random access procedure triggered above;

2> stop timer T304 for that cell group;

2> apply the parts of the CQI reporting configuration, the scheduling request configuration and the sounding RS configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell, if any;

2> apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the respective target SpCell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of that target SpCell;

2> if the reconfigurationWithSync was included in spCellConfig of an MCG:

3> if T390 is running:

4> stop timer T390 for all access categories;

4> perform the actions as specified in 5.3.14.4.

3> if RRCReconfiguration does not include dedicatedSIB1-Delivery and

3> if the active downlink BWP, which is indicated by the firstActiveDownlinkBWP-Id for the target SpCell of the MCG, has a common search space configured by searchSpaceSIB1:

4> acquire the SIB1, which is scheduled as specified in TS 38.213 [13], of the target SpCell of the MCG;

4> upon acquiring SIB1, perform the actions specified in clause 5.2.2.4.2;

2> the procedure ends.

NOTE: The UE is only required to acquire broadcasted SIB1 if the UE can acquire it without disrupting unicast data reception, i.e. the broadcast and unicast beams are quasi co-located.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

3> if target RAT of handover is E-UTRA/5GC, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10];

3> else:

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the UE is operating in EN-DC:

3>if the DRB was configured with the same eps-BearerIdentity either by NR or E-UTRA prior to receiving this reconfiguration:

4> associate the established DRB with the corresponding eps-BearerIdentity;

3> else:

4> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration:

2> if the reestablishPDCP is set:

3> if target RAT is E-UTRA/5GC, or;

3> if the UE is only connected to E-UTRA/5GC:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key configured/derived as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.4.2.3, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

3> else:

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is not configured with cipheringDisabled:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithm and KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/ KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB), as indicated in keyToUse, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent PDCP PDUs received and sent by the UE;

4> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

5> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

3> re-establish the PDCP entity of this DRB as specified in 38.323 [5], clause 5.1.2;

2> else, if the recoverPDCP is set:

3> trigger the PDCP entity of this DRB to perform data recovery as specified in 38.323 [5];

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

NOTE 1: Void.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KeNB or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of cipheriong or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

8.2.2.9.1.3 Test description

8.2.2.9.1.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and Split) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (EN-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and Split) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.9.1.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to change the primaryPath of the Split DRB to E-UTRA radio path from NR.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using E-UTRA radio path in the uplink?

1

P

4

The SS transmits an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to change the primaryPath of the Split DRB from E-UTRA radio path to NR.

<–

RRCConnectionReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on the Split DRB#2 using NR radio path in the uplink?

2

P

8.2.2.9.1.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-1: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-2: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-3: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

statusReportRequired

true

}

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

0

}

ul-DataSplitThreshold

infinity

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-4: RRCConnectionReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 36.508 [7], Table 4.6.1-8

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

c1 CHOICE {

rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8 SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nr-RadioBearerConfig1-r15

OCTET STRING including RadioBearerConfig.

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-5: RadioBearerConfig (Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-6: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.9.1.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

statusReportRequired

true

}

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

}

ul-DataSplitThreshold

infinity

}

}

8.2.2.9.2 Bearer Modification / Uplink data path / Split DRB Reconfiguration / NR-DC

8.2.2.9.2.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC,and, MCG and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to change the primaryPath to MCG radio path from SCG radio path }

then { UE changes the uplink data path to MCG radio path and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NR-DC, and, MCG and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCReconfiguration message to change the primaryPath to SCG radio path from MCG radio path }

then { UE changes the uplink data path to SCG radio path and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.9.2.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present test case are specified in: TS 38.331, clauses 5.3.5.3 and 5.3.5.6.5. Unless otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements.

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration is applied due to a conditional reconfiguration execution upon cell selection while timer T311 is running, as defined in 5.3.7.3:

2> remove all the entries within VarConditionalReconfig, if any;

1> else:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the fullConfig:

3> perform the full configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.5.11;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the received masterCellGroup according to 5.3.5.5;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the masterKeyUpdate:

2> perform AS security key update procedure as specified in 5.3.5.7;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the sk-Counter:

2> perform security key update procedure as specified in 5.3.5.7;

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the secondaryCellGroup:

2> perform the cell group configuration for the SCG according to 5.3.5.5;

….

1> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the radioBearerConfig:

2> perform the radio bearer configuration according to 5.3.5.6;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

….

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message was received via SRB1, but not within mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup or E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfiguration:

3> if the UE is configured to provide the measurement gap requirement information of NR target bands:

4> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the needForGapsConfigNR; or

4> if the NeedForGapsInfoNR information is changed compared to last time the UE reported this information:

5> include the NeedForGapsInfoNR and set the contents as follows:

6> include intraFreq-needForGap and set the gap requirement informantion of intra-frequency measurement for each NR serving cell;

6> if requestedTargetBandFilterNR is configured, for each supported NR band that is also included in requestedTargetBandFilterNR, include an entry in interFreq-needForGap and set the gap requirement information for that band; otherwise, include an entry in interFreq-needForGap and set the corresponding gap requirement information for each supported NR band;

1> else (RRCReconfiguration was received via SRB1):

2> submit the RRCReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;

2> if this is the first RRCReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC re-establishment procedure:

3> resume SRB2 and DRBs that are suspended;

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.6.5]

The UE shall:

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment including the case when full configuration option is used):

2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;

3> else (i.e., UE connected to NR or UE connected to E-UTRA/EPC):

4> configure the PDCP entity with the ciphering algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPenc key associated with the master key (KeNB/KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB/S-KeNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

2> if the PDCP entity of this DRB is configured with integrityProtection:

3> configure the PDCP entity with the integrity protection algorithms according to securityConfig and apply the KUPint key associated with the master (KgNB) or the secondary key (S-KgNB) as indicated in keyToUse;

….

1> for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration and not configured as DAPS bearer:

2> if the pdcp-Config is included:

3> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config.

NOTE 1: Void.

NOTE 2: When determining whether a drb-Identity value is part of the current UE configuration, the UE does not distinguish which RadioBearerConfig and DRB-ToAddModList that DRB was originally configured in. To re-associate a DRB with a different key (KeNB to S-KgNB, KgNB to S-KeNB, KgNB to S-KgNB, or vice versa), the network provides the drb-Identity value in the (target) drb-ToAddModList and sets the reestablishPDCP flag. The network does not list the drb-Identity in the (source) drb-ToReleaseList.

NOTE 3: When setting the reestablishPDCP flag for a radio bearer, the network ensures that the RLC receiver entities do not deliver old PDCP PDUs to the re-established PDCP entity. It does that e.g. by triggering a reconfiguration with sync of the cell group hosting the old RLC entity or by releasing the old RLC entity.

NOTE 4: In this specification, UE configuration refers to the parameters configured by NR RRC unless otherwise stated.

NOTE 5: Ciphering and integrity protection can be enabled or disabled for a DRB. The enabling/disabling of ciphering or integrity protection can be changed only by releasing and adding the DRB.

8.2.2.9.2.3 Test description

8.2.2.9.2.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and NR Cell 10 is the PSCell.

– System information combination NR-1 as defined in TS 38.508-1 [4] clause 4.4.3.1.3 is used in NR cell 1.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and Split) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NR-DC), Bearers (MCG and Split) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.9.2.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to change the primaryPath to MCG radio path from SCG radio path.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

NR RRC: RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#n using MCG radio path in the uplink?

1

P

4

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to change the primaryPath to SCG radio path from MCG radio path.

<–

NR RRC: RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

NR RRC: RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on on Split DRB#n using SCG radio path in the uplink?

2

P

8.2.2.9.2.3.3 Specific message contents

Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-1: RRCReconfiguration (step 4, Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-NR-DC_SCG

See Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-2

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-2: RadioBearerConfig-NR-DC_SCG (Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBn

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity with condition DRBn

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-3: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-2)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

statusReportRequired

True

}

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

1

}

ul-DataSplitThreshold

Infinity

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-4: RRCReconfiguration (step 1, Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.2-1)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.1-13

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RRCReconfiguration ::= SEQUENCE {

criticalExtensions CHOICE {

rrcReconfiguration SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

nonCriticalExtension SEQUENCE {

radioBearerConfig2

RadioBearerConfig-NR-DC_SCG

See Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-5

}

}

}

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-5: RadioBearerConfig-NR-DC_SCG (Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-4)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-132 with condition DRBn

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

RadioBearerConfig ::= SEQUENCE {

drb-ToAddModList SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod {

1 entry

DRB-ToAddMod[1] SEQUENCE {

entry 1

drb-Identity

DRB-Identity with condition DRBn

DRBn is allocated for SCG according to internal TTCN mapping

pdcp-Config

PDCP-Config

}

}

}

Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-6: PDCP-Config (Table 8.2.2.9.2.3.3-5)

Derivation Path: TS 38.508-1 [4], Table 4.6.3-99

Information Element

Value/remark

Comment

Condition

PDCP-Config ::= SEQUENCE {

drb SEQUENCE {

statusReportRequired

true

}

moreThanOneRLC SEQUENCE {

primaryPath SEQUENCE {

cellGroup

0

}

ul-DataSplitThreshold

infinity

}

}

8.2.2.9.3 Bearer Modification / Uplink data path / Split DRB Reconfiguration / NE-DC

8.2.2.9.3.1 Test Purpose (TP)

(1)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, MCG(s) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCCReconfiguration message to change the primaryPath to NR radio path from EUTRA }

then { UE changes the uplink data path to NR radio path and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

(2)

with { UE in RRC_CONNECTED state with NE-DC, and, MCG(s) and Split }

ensure that {

when { UE receives an RRCCReconfiguration message to change the primaryPath from NR radio path to EUTRA }

then { UE changes the uplink data path to EUTRA radio path and sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message }

}

8.2.2.9.3.2 Conformance requirements

References: The conformance requirements covered in the present TC are specified in: TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3 and TS 36.331 clauses 5.3.5.3 and 5.3.10.3a1. Unless and otherwise stated these are Rel-15 requirements

[TS 38.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

The UE shall perform the following actions upon reception of the RRCReconfiguration, or upon execution of the conditional reconfiguration (CHO, CPA or CPC):

1> if the RRCReconfiguration includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig:

2> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to setup:

3> if the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig includes mrdc-ReleaseAndAdd:

4> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to nr-SCG:

4> perform the RRC reconfiguration according to 5.3.5.3 for the RRCReconfiguration message included in nr-SCG;

3> if the received mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup is set to eutra-SCG:

4> perform the RRC connection reconfiguration as specified in TS 36.331 [10], clause 5.3.5.3 for the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message included in eutra-SCG;

2> else (mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig is set to release):

3> perform MR-DC release as specified in clause 5.3.5.10;

1> set the content of the RRCReconfigurationComplete message as follows:

2> if the RRCReconfiguration message includes the mrdc-SecondaryCellGroupConfig with mrdc-SecondaryCellGroup set to eutra-SCG:

3> include in the eutra-SCG-Response the E-UTRA RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message in accordance with TS 36.331 [10] clause 5.3.5.3;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.5.3]

If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:

1> if the UE is configured with NE-DC:

2> if the received RRCConnectionReconfiguration message was included in an NR RRCResume message:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCResumeComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.13.4;

2> else:

3> transfer the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message via SRB1 embedded in NR RRC message RRCReconfigurationComplete as specified in TS 38.331 [82], clause 5.3.5.3;

1> else:

2> submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;

[TS 36.331, clause 5.3.10.3a1]

For the drb-Identity value for which this procedure is initiated, the UE shall:

1> if drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value; and drb-Identity value is not part of the current UE configuration (i.e. DC specific DRB establishment):

2> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value (i.e. add split DRB):

3> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current MCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config included in drb-ToAddModList;

3> establish an MCG RLC entity and an MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config, logicalChannelIdentity and logicalChannelConfig included in drb-ToAddModList;

3> establish an SCG RLC entity and an SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

2> else (i.e. add SCG DRB):

3> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current SCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> establish a primary SCG RLC entity or entities and a primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

4> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

2> indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;

1> else (i.e. DC specific DRB modification; drb-ToAddModList and/ or drb-ToAddModListSCG received):

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is a split DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-TypeChange is included and set to toMCG (i.e. split to MCG):

4> release the SCG RLC entity or entities and the SCG DTCH logical channel(s);

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> establish a secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

3> else (i.e. reconfigure split):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the MCG RLC entity and/ or the MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the SCG RLC entity and/ or the SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an SCG DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModList is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-TypeChange is included and set to toMCG (i.e. SCG to MCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity with the current MCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the SCG RLC entity or entities (both primary and secondary, if configured) and the SCG DTCH logical channel (both primary and secondary, if configured) to be an MCG RLC entity or entities and an MCG DTCH logical channel;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config, logicalChannelIdentity and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

3> else (i.e. drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value i.e. reconfigure SCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> reconfigure the primary SCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

2> if the DRB indicated by drb-Identity is an MCG DRB:

3> if drb-ToAddModListSCG is received and includes the drb-Identity value, while for this entry drb-Type is included and set to split (i.e. MCG to split):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> reconfigure the primary MCG RLC entity and/ or the primary MCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-Config and logicalChannelConfig, if included in drb-ToAddModList;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary MCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> establish an SCG RLC entity and an SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

3> else (i.e. drb-Type is included and set to scg i.e. MCG to SCG):

4> reconfigure the PDCP entity with the current SCG security configuration and in accordance with the pdcp-Config, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> reconfigure the MCG RLC entity or entities (both primary and secondary, if configured) and the MCG DTCH logical channel (both primary and secondary, if configured) to be an SCG RLC entity or entities and an SCG DTCH logical channel;

4> reconfigure the primary SCG RLC entity or entities and/ or the primary SCG DTCH logical channel in accordance with the rlc-ConfigSCG, logicalChannelIdentitySCG and logicalChannelConfigSCG, if included in drb-ToAddModListSCG;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value release:

5> release the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities as well as the associated DTCH logical channel;

4> if rlc-BearerConfigSecondary is included with value setup;

5> if the current DRB configuration does not include a secondary RLC bearer:

6> establish a secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and an associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary and associate these with the E-UTRA PDCP entity with the same value of srb-Identity within the current UE configuration;

5> else:

6> reconfigure the secondary SCG RLC entity or entities and the associated DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received rlc-BearerConfigSecondary;

8.2.2.9.3.3 Test description

8.2.2.9.3.3.1 Pre-test conditions

System Simulator:

– NR Cell 1 is the PCell and E-UTRA Cell 1 is the PSCell.

UE:

– None.

Preamble:

– If pc_IP_Ping is set to TRUE then, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NE-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and Split) established according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

– Else, the UE is in state RRC_CONNECTED using generic procedure parameter Connectivity (NE-DC), Bearers (MCG(s) and Split) established and Test Loop Function (On) with UE test loop mode B according to TS 38.508-1 [4], clause 4.5.4.

8.2.2.9.3.3.2 Test procedure sequence

Table 8.2.2.9.3.3.2-1: Main behaviour

St

Procedure

Message Sequence

TP

Verdict

U – S

Message

1

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to change the primaryPath of the Split DRB to NR radio path from E-UTRA.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

2

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

1

P

3

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on Split DRB#2 using NR radio path in the uplink?

1

P

4

The SS transmits an RRCReconfiguration message containing NR RadioBearerConfig to change the primaryPath of the Split DRB from NR radio path to E-UTRA.

<–

RRCReconfiguration

5

Check: Does the UE transmit an RRCReconfigurationComplete message?

–>

RRCReconfigurationComplete

2

P

6

Check: Does the test result of generic test procedure in TS 38.508-1 subclause 4.9.1 indicate that the UE is capable of exchanging IP data on the Split DRB#2 using E-UTRA radio path in the uplink?

2

P

8.2.2.9.3.3.3 Specific message contents

FFS